You are on page 1of 266

OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System V100R005C00

IDU Hardware Description


Issue Date 02 2010-03-30

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks and Permissions


and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.

Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.


Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com

Website: Email:

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

About This Document

About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name OptiX RTN 620 iManager U2000 Version V100R005C00 V100R002C00

Intended Audience
The intended audiences of this document are:
l l l l l l

Network planning engineer Hardware installation engineer Installation and commissioning engineer Field maintenance engineer Data configuration engineer System maintenance engineer

Before reading this document, you need to be familiar with the following:
l l

Basics of digital microwave communication Basics of the OptiX RTN 620

Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iii

About This Document

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Symbol

Description Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.

Update History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made to previous issues.

Updates in Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00


This document is the second release of the V100R005C00 version. Compared with the first release, the updated contents are as follows: Update 5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable Description The wire color of the auxiliary interface cable is added.

Updates in Issue 01 (2009-12-30) Based on Product Version V100R005C00


This document is the first release of the V100R005C00 version.

iv

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Contents

Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Introduction to the Product......................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Positioning.......................................................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Components.....................................................................................................................................................1-4

2 Chassis..........................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Chassis Structure.............................................................................................................................................2-2 2.2 Installation Mode.............................................................................................................................................2-2 2.3 Installation Holes of the Chassis.....................................................................................................................2-2 2.4 IDU Labels......................................................................................................................................................2-3

3 Boards...........................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Board Appearance...........................................................................................................................................3-3 3.2 Board Configuration........................................................................................................................................3-3 3.3 IF1A/IF1B.......................................................................................................................................................3-6 3.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................3-7 3.3.2 Functions and Features...........................................................................................................................3-7 3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................3-8 3.3.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-12 3.3.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-15 3.3.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-15 3.3.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-17 3.4 IFX................................................................................................................................................................3-18 3.4.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-19 3.4.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-19 3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-21 3.4.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-24 3.4.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-27 3.4.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-27 3.4.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-29 3.5 IF0A/IF0B.....................................................................................................................................................3-30 3.5.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-31 3.5.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-31 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-32 Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

Contents

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description 3.5.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-34 3.5.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-37 3.5.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-37 3.5.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-39

3.6 IFH2..............................................................................................................................................................3-40 3.6.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-40 3.6.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-40 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-42 3.6.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-46 3.6.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-49 3.6.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-50 3.6.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-53 3.7 SL4................................................................................................................................................................3-55 3.7.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-55 3.7.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-55 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-57 3.7.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-60 3.7.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-62 3.7.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-62 3.7.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-62 3.7.8 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-63 3.8 SL1/SD1........................................................................................................................................................3-64 3.8.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-64 3.8.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-64 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-66 3.8.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-68 3.8.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-70 3.8.6 Board Feature Code..............................................................................................................................3-71 3.8.7 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-71 3.8.8 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-72 3.9 SLE/SDE.......................................................................................................................................................3-73 3.9.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................3-73 3.9.2 Functions and Features.........................................................................................................................3-73 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................3-75 3.9.4 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................3-77 3.9.5 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................3-79 3.9.6 NM Configuration Reference...............................................................................................................3-79 3.9.7 Specifications.......................................................................................................................................3-80 3.10 PL3..............................................................................................................................................................3-81 3.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-81 3.10.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-81 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-82 vi Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Contents

3.10.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-84 3.10.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-85 3.10.6 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................3-86 3.10.7 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................3-86 3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1.............................................................................................................................................3-87 3.11.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-87 3.11.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-88 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-88 3.11.4 Front Panel.........................................................................................................................................3-90 3.11.5 Valid Slots..........................................................................................................................................3-95 3.11.6 Board Feature Code............................................................................................................................3-96 3.11.7 NM Configuration Reference.............................................................................................................3-96 3.11.8 Specifications.....................................................................................................................................3-97 3.12 EFT4............................................................................................................................................................3-97 3.12.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................3-98 3.12.2 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................3-98 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow...................................................................................................3-99 3.12.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-101 3.12.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-103 3.12.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-104 3.12.7 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-106 3.13 EMS6.........................................................................................................................................................3-107 3.13.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-107 3.13.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-108 3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-111 3.13.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-113 3.13.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-117 3.13.6 Board Feature Code..........................................................................................................................3-118 3.13.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-118 3.13.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-122 3.14 EFP6..........................................................................................................................................................3-124 3.14.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-124 3.14.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-124 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow.................................................................................................3-127 3.14.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-129 3.14.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-132 3.14.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-133 3.14.7 Technical Specifications..................................................................................................................3-136 3.15 PXC...........................................................................................................................................................3-137 3.15.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-138 3.15.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-138 3.15.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-139 Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

Contents

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description 3.15.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-141 3.15.5 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-143 3.15.6 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-143 3.15.7 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-144

3.16 SCC...........................................................................................................................................................3-145 3.16.1 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-145 3.16.2 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-146 3.16.3 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-147 3.16.4 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-148 3.16.5 Jumpers and Storage Card................................................................................................................3-155 3.16.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-158 3.16.7 NM Configuration Reference...........................................................................................................3-158 3.16.8 Specifications...................................................................................................................................3-160 3.17 Fan Tray Assembly...................................................................................................................................3-161 3.17.1 Composition.....................................................................................................................................3-162 3.17.2 Version Description..........................................................................................................................3-162 3.17.3 Functions and Features.....................................................................................................................3-162 3.17.4 Working Principle............................................................................................................................3-162 3.17.5 Front Panel.......................................................................................................................................3-163 3.17.6 Valid Slots........................................................................................................................................3-164

4 Accessories...................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 E1 Panel...........................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.2 PDU.................................................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.1 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................4-4 4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle...........................................................................................................4-6 4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode.......................................................................................................................4-7

5 Cables...........................................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Power Cable....................................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2 Protection Ground Cable.................................................................................................................................5-3 5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable................................................................................................................5-4 5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 Panel..........................................................................................5-4 5.3 IF Jumper.........................................................................................................................................................5-5 5.4 XPIC Cable.....................................................................................................................................................5-6 5.5 Fiber Jumper....................................................................................................................................................5-7 5.6 E1 Cable..........................................................................................................................................................5-9 5.6.1 DB44 E1 Cable.....................................................................................................................................5-10 5.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 Cable..........................................................................................................................5-14 5.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 Cable......................................................................................................................5-15 5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e Cable.....................................................................5-17 5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable..............................................................................................................................5-18 5.9 External Alarm Transit Cable.......................................................................................................................5-21 5.10 Serial Port Cable..........................................................................................................................................5-23 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Contents

5.11 Orderwire Line............................................................................................................................................5-24 5.12 Network Cable.............................................................................................................................................5-25

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards...................................................A-1 B Glossary......................................................................................................................................B-1 C Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................ C-1

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

ix

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Figures

Figures
Figure 1-1 TDM radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620..................................................1-2 Figure 1-2 Hybrid radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620............................................... 1-3 Figure 1-3 Hybrid transmission network of the OptiX RTN 620 and other OptiX transmission products......... 1-3 Figure 1-4 IDU 620..............................................................................................................................................1-5 Figure 1-5 Direct mounting .................................................................................................................................1-7 Figure 1-6 Separate mounting..............................................................................................................................1-7 Figure 2-1 IDU 620 chassis structure...................................................................................................................2-2 Figure 2-2 IDU 620 chassis with wall-mounting holes........................................................................................2-3 Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 620 labels..........................................................................................................2-5 Figure 3-1 Board appearance................................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-2 Board bar code....................................................................................................................................3-3 Figure 3-3 IDU 620 configuration........................................................................................................................3-4 Figure 3-4 Block diagram of the IF1A/IF1B working principle..........................................................................3-9 Figure 3-5 IF1A front panel...............................................................................................................................3-12 Figure 3-6 IF1B front panel................................................................................................................................3-13 Figure 3-7 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 620............................................................................................3-15 Figure 3-8 Block diagram of the IFX working principle...................................................................................3-21 Figure 3-9 IFX front panel.................................................................................................................................3-25 Figure 3-10 Slots of the IFX in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-27 Figure 3-11 Block diagram of the IF0A/IF0B working principle......................................................................3-32 Figure 3-12 IF0A front panel.............................................................................................................................3-35 Figure 3-13 IF0B front panel..............................................................................................................................3-35 Figure 3-14 Slots of the IF0A/IF0B in the IDU 620..........................................................................................3-37 Figure 3-15 Cable connection for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection in the Hybrid microwave..........................3-42 Figure 3-16 Block diagram of the IFH2 working principle...............................................................................3-43 Figure 3-17 IFH2 front panel.............................................................................................................................3-46 Figure 3-18 RJ-45 front view.............................................................................................................................3-47 Figure 3-19 Slots of the IFH2 in the IDU 620...................................................................................................3-49 Figure 3-20 Block diagram of the SL4 working principle.................................................................................3-58 Figure 3-21 SL4 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-60 Figure 3-22 Slots of the SL4 in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-62 Figure 3-23 Block diagram of the SL1/SD1 working principle.........................................................................3-66 Figure 3-24 SL1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-68 Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

Figures

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description Figure 3-25 SD1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-68

Figure 3-26 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 620.............................................................................................3-70 Figure 3-27 Block diagram of the SLE/SDE working principle........................................................................3-75 Figure 3-28 SLE front panel...............................................................................................................................3-77 Figure 3-29 SDE front panel..............................................................................................................................3-77 Figure 3-30 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 620............................................................................................3-79 Figure 3-31 Block diagram of the PL3 working principle.................................................................................3-82 Figure 3-32 PL3 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-84 Figure 3-33 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 620.....................................................................................................3-85 Figure 3-34 Block diagram of the PO1/PH1/PD1 working principle................................................................3-88 Figure 3-35 PO1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-90 Figure 3-36 PH1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-90 Figure 3-37 PD1 front panel...............................................................................................................................3-91 Figure 3-38 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)........................................................................3-92 Figure 3-39 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).......................................................................3-93 Figure 3-40 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)............................................................................3-94 Figure 3-41 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 620....................................................................................3-96 Figure 3-42 Block diagram of the EFT4 working principle.............................................................................3-100 Figure 3-43 EFT4 front panel...........................................................................................................................3-101 Figure 3-44 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-102 Figure 3-45 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 620.................................................................................................3-103 Figure 3-46 Block diagram of the EMS6 working principle............................................................................3-111 Figure 3-47 EMS6 front panel..........................................................................................................................3-113 Figure 3-48 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-115 Figure 3-49 Slots of the EMS6 in the IDU 620................................................................................................3-117 Figure 3-50 Principle block diagram of the EFP6............................................................................................3-128 Figure 3-51 Front panel of the EFP6................................................................................................................3-129 Figure 3-52 RJ-45 front view...........................................................................................................................3-131 Figure 3-53 Slots of the EFP6 in the IDU 620.................................................................................................3-132 Figure 3-54 Block diagram of the PXC............................................................................................................3-139 Figure 3-55 Cross-connect unit architecture....................................................................................................3-140 Figure 3-56 PXC front panel............................................................................................................................3-141 Figure 3-57 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 620..................................................................................................3-143 Figure 3-58 Block diagram of the SCC............................................................................................................3-147 Figure 3-59 SCC front panel............................................................................................................................3-149 Figure 3-60 Pin assignments of the COM interface.........................................................................................3-151 Figure 3-61 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface........................................................................3-152 Figure 3-62 Wrong connection of the ETH and the ETH-HUB interfaces......................................................3-153 Figure 3-63 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface...............................................................................3-153 Figure 3-64 Positions of the jumpers and storage card....................................................................................3-156 Figure 3-65 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 620....................................................................................................3-158 Figure 3-66 Positions of Serial 1 to Serial 4 overhead bytes in an SDH frame...............................................3-159 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Figures

Figure 3-67 Fan tray assembly composition....................................................................................................3-162 Figure 3-68 Block diagram of the fan board....................................................................................................3-163 Figure 3-69 FAN front panel............................................................................................................................3-164 Figure 3-70 Slot of the fan tray assembly in the IDU 620...............................................................................3-165 Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel..................................................................................................................4-2 Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)...........................................................................................4-3 Figure 4-3 PDU front panel..................................................................................................................................4-5 Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the PDU working principle....................................................................................4-6 Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-C mode...............................................................................4-7 Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-I mode.................................................................................4-8 Figure 5-1 Diagram of the power cable................................................................................................................5-3 Figure 5-2 Diagram of the IDU protection ground cable.....................................................................................5-4 Figure 5-3 Diagram of the protection ground cable of an E1 panel.....................................................................5-5 Figure 5-4 View of the IF jumper........................................................................................................................5-6 Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable......................................................................................................................5-7 Figure 5-6 LC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-7 SC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-8 Figure 5-8 FC/PC fiber connector........................................................................................................................5-9 Figure 5-9 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (2x8 core cable)................................................................................5-10 Figure 5-10 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (1x16 core cable)............................................................................5-11 Figure 5-11 Diagram of the 120-ohm cable.......................................................................................................5-11 Figure 5-12 Diagram of the DB44-DB37 E1 cable............................................................................................5-14 Figure 5-13 Diagram of the MDR68-D44 E1 cable...........................................................................................5-16 Figure 5-14 Diagram of the external clock cable/wayside service cable/STM-1e cable...................................5-18 Figure 5-15 Diagram of the auxiliary interface cable........................................................................................5-19 Figure 5-16 Diagram of the external alarm transit cable....................................................................................5-21 Figure 5-17 Diagram of the serial port cable......................................................................................................5-24 Figure 5-18 Diagram of the orderwire wire.......................................................................................................5-24 Figure 5-19 Diagram of the network cable.........................................................................................................5-26

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xiii

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Tables

Tables
Table 1-1 Brief introduction to the IDU 620........................................................................................................1-4 Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620.............................................................................1-5 Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620..........................................................................1-6 Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels..............................................................................................................2-3 Table 3-1 List of boards on the IDU 620..............................................................................................................3-4 Table 3-2 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1A/IF1B......................................................3-9 Table 3-3 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1A/IF1B...................................................3-11 Table 3-4 IF1A/IF1B indicator description........................................................................................................3-13 Table 3-5 IF1A/IF1B interface description........................................................................................................3-14 Table 3-6 Slot assigning principle of the IF1A/IF1B.........................................................................................3-15 Table 3-7 Radio work modes..............................................................................................................................3-15 Table 3-8 IF performance...................................................................................................................................3-17 Table 3-9 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem...................................................................3-18 Table 3-10 Integrated system performance of the IF1A/IF1B...........................................................................3-18 Table 3-11 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX..............................................................3-22 Table 3-12 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX............................................................3-24 Table 3-13 IFX indicator description.................................................................................................................3-25 Table 3-14 IFX interface description..................................................................................................................3-26 Table 3-15 Slot assigning principle of the IFX..................................................................................................3-27 Table 3-16 Radio work mode.............................................................................................................................3-27 Table 3-17 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-29 Table 3-18 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-30 Table 3-19 XPIC performance...........................................................................................................................3-30 Table 3-20 Integrated system performance of the IFX.......................................................................................3-30 Table 3-21 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF0A/IF0B..................................................3-33 Table 3-22 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF0A/IF0B.................................................3-34 Table 3-23 IF0A/IF0B indicator description......................................................................................................3-35 Table 3-24 IF0A/IF0B interface description......................................................................................................3-36 Table 3-25 Slot assigning principle of the IF0A/IF0B.......................................................................................3-37 Table 3-26 Radio work modes............................................................................................................................3-38 Table 3-27 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-39 Table 3-28 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-39 Table 3-29 Integrated system performance of the IF0A/IF0B...........................................................................3-40 Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xv

Tables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description Table 3-30 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFH2............................................................3-43 Table 3-31 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFH2..........................................................3-45 Table 3-32 IFH2 indicator description............................................................................................................... 3-46 Table 3-33 IFH2 interface description................................................................................................................3-47 Table 3-34 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..............................................................3-48 Table 3-35 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode......................................................... 3-48 Table 3-36 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description........................................................................................3-49 Table 3-37 Slot assigning principle of the IFH2................................................................................................ 3-50 Table 3-38 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames........................................................... 3-50 Table 3-39 IF performance.................................................................................................................................3-53 Table 3-40 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem................................................................3-54 Table 3-41 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance..............................................................................3-54 Table 3-42 Integrated system performance of the IFH2.....................................................................................3-55 Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL4..............................................................3-58 Table 3-44 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL4............................................................3-60 Table 3-45 SL4 indicator description.................................................................................................................3-61 Table 3-46 SL4 interface description................................................................................................................. 3-61 Table 3-47 Board feature code of the SL4......................................................................................................... 3-62 Table 3-48 STM-4 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-63 Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL4...............................................................3-64 Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1/SD1..................................................... 3-67 Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1/SD1....................................................3-68 Table 3-52 SL1/SD1 indicator description.........................................................................................................3-69 Table 3-53 SL1 interface description................................................................................................................. 3-70 Table 3-54 SD1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-70 Table 3-55 Slot assigning principle of the SL1/SD1..........................................................................................3-71 Table 3-56 Board feature code of the SL1/SD1.................................................................................................3-71 Table 3-57 STM-1 optical interface performance..............................................................................................3-72 Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL1/SD1.......................................................3-73 Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SLE/SDE.................................................... 3-75 Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SLE/SDE...................................................3-76 Table 3-61 SLE/SDE indicator description........................................................................................................3-78 Table 3-62 SLE interface description.................................................................................................................3-78 Table 3-63 SDE interface description................................................................................................................ 3-78 Table 3-64 Slot assigning principle of the SLE/SDE.........................................................................................3-79 Table 3-65 STM-1 electrical interface performance.......................................................................................... 3-80 Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SLE/SDE......................................................3-80 Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PL3..............................................................3-82 Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PL3............................................................3-83 Table 3-69 PL3 indicator description.................................................................................................................3-84 Table 3-70 PL3 interface description................................................................................................................. 3-85 Table 3-71 Slot assigning principle of the PL3..................................................................................................3-85

xvi

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Tables

Table 3-72 E3/T3 interface performance............................................................................................................3-86 Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PL3...............................................................3-86 Table 3-74 Differences between SL61PO1 and SL62PO1...............................................................................3-87 Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1.............................................3-89 Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1...........................................3-89 Table 3-77 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description................................................................................................3-91 Table 3-78 SL61PO1 interface description........................................................................................................3-91 Table 3-79 SL62PO1 interface description........................................................................................................3-92 Table 3-80 PH1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-92 Table 3-81 PD1 interface description.................................................................................................................3-92 Table 3-82 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1).........................................................................3-93 Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).........................................................................3-93 Table 3-84 Indicator description of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1).................................................................3-94 Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)..............................................................................3-94 Table 3-86 Slot assigning principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1.................................................................................3-96 Table 3-87 Board feature code of the PO1/PH1/PD1.........................................................................................3-96 Table 3-88 E1 interface performance.................................................................................................................3-97 Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PO1/PH1......................................................3-97 Table 3-90 Differences between SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B.....................................................3-98 Table 3-91 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFT4.........................................................3-100 Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFT4.......................................................3-101 Table 3-93 EFT4 indicator description.............................................................................................................3-102 Table 3-94 EFT4 interface description.............................................................................................................3-102 Table 3-95 Pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces.........................................................................................3-103 Table 3-96 Ethernet port indicator description.................................................................................................3-103 Table 3-97 Slot assigning principle of the EFT4..............................................................................................3-104 Table 3-98 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance.....................................................................................3-106 Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFT4..........................................................3-107 Table 3-100 Differences between SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B...............................................3-108 Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EMS6......................................................3-112 Table 3-102 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EMS6....................................................3-112 Table 3-103 EMS6 indicator description..........................................................................................................3-113 Table 3-104 EMS6 interface description..........................................................................................................3-115 Table 3-105 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..........................................................3-116 Table 3-106 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.....................................................3-116 Table 3-107 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description....................................................................................3-117 Table 3-108 Slot assigning principle of the EMS6...........................................................................................3-118 Table 3-109 Board feature code of the EMS6..................................................................................................3-118 Table 3-110 GE optical interface performance................................................................................................3-122 Table 3-111 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance..........................................................................3-123 Table 3-112 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance...................................................................................3-123 Table 3-113 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EMS6.......................................................3-124 Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii

Tables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description Table 3-114 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFP6.......................................................3-128 Table 3-115 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFP6......................................................3-129 Table 3-116 Description of indicators on the EFP6.........................................................................................3-130 Table 3-117 Description of the interfaces on the EFP6....................................................................................3-131 Table 3-118 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode..........................................................3-131 Table 3-119 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode.....................................................3-132 Table 3-120 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description....................................................................................3-132 Table 3-121 Slot Allocation for the SL1D.......................................................................................................3-133 Table 3-122 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance...................................................................................3-137 Table 3-123 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFP6.........................................................3-137 Table 3-124 PXC indicator description............................................................................................................3-141 Table 3-125 PXC interface description............................................................................................................3-142 Table 3-126 Slot assigning principle of the PXC.............................................................................................3-143 Table 3-127 Clock timing and synchronization performance..........................................................................3-144 Table 3-128 Wayside service interface performance.......................................................................................3-144 Table 3-129 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PXC..........................................................3-145 Table 3-130 Difference between the functional versions.................................................................................3-146 Table 3-131 SCC indicator description............................................................................................................3-149 Table 3-132 SCC interface description............................................................................................................3-150 Table 3-133 Pin assignments of the COM interface.........................................................................................3-151 Table 3-134 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface.......................................................................3-152 Table 3-135 ETH/ETH-HUB indicator description.........................................................................................3-152 Table 3-136 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) interface.............................................................3-153 Table 3-137 Setting the jumpers.......................................................................................................................3-156 Table 3-138 Orderwire interface performance.................................................................................................3-160 Table 3-139 Synchronous data interface performance.....................................................................................3-160 Table 3-140 Asynchronous data interface performance...................................................................................3-161 Table 3-141 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SCC..........................................................3-161 Table 3-142 Differences between SL61FAN and SL61FANA........................................................................3-162 Table 3-143 FAN indicator description............................................................................................................3-164 Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel.....................................................................................................4-2 Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)............................................................................................4-3 Table 4-3 PDU interface description....................................................................................................................4-5 Table 5-1 Power cable connections......................................................................................................................5-3 Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers.........................................................................................................................5-7 Table 5-3 75-ohm E1 cable connections (2x8 core cable).................................................................................5-12 Table 5-4 75-ohm E1 cable connections (1x16 core cable)...............................................................................5-12 Table 5-5 120-ohm E1 cable connections..........................................................................................................5-13 Table 5-6 Connection table of the DB44-DB37 E1 cabl....................................................................................5-15 Table 5-7 MDR68-DB44 E1 cable connections.................................................................................................5-16 Table 5-8 Auxiliary interface cable connections (1)..........................................................................................5-19 Table 5-9 Auxiliary interface cable connections (2)..........................................................................................5-20

xviii

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Tables

Table 5-10 Auxiliary interface cable connections (3)........................................................................................5-21 Table 5-11 External alarm transit cable connections..........................................................................................5-22 Table 5-12 Serial port cable connections........................................................................................................... 5-24 Table 5-13 Orderwire wire connections.............................................................................................................5-25 Table 5-14 Pin assignments of the MDI.............................................................................................................5-25 Table 5-15 Pin assignments of the MDI-X.........................................................................................................5-26 Table 5-16 Cable connection of the straight through cable................................................................................5-27 Table 5-17 Cable connection of the crossover cable..........................................................................................5-27 Table A-1 IF1A/IF1B indicator description........................................................................................................A-1 Table A-2 IFX indicator description....................................................................................................................A-2 Table A-3 IF0A/IF0B indicator description........................................................................................................A-4 Table A-4 IFH2 indicator description..................................................................................................................A-5 Table A-5 SL4 indicator description...................................................................................................................A-6 Table A-6 SL1/SD1 indicator description...........................................................................................................A-6 Table A-7 SLE/SDE indicator description..........................................................................................................A-7 Table A-8 PL3 indicator description...................................................................................................................A-8 Table A-9 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description..................................................................................................A-8 Table A-10 EFT4 indicator description...............................................................................................................A-9 Table A-11 EMS6 indicator description..............................................................................................................A-9 Table A-12 Description of indicators on the EFP6...........................................................................................A-11 Table A-13 PXC indicator description..............................................................................................................A-12 Table A-14 SCC indicator description..............................................................................................................A-13 Table A-15 FAN indicator description..............................................................................................................A-14 Table A-16 Weight of Boards............................................................................................................................A-14

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

xix

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction to the Product

1
About This Chapter

Introduction to the Product

This chapter provides basic information on the OptiX RTN 620 and the IDU 620 in terms of product application and equipment type. 1.1 Positioning The OptiX RTN 620 is a split radio transmission system developed by Huawei. It can provide a seamless radio transmission solution for the mobile communication network or private networks. 1.2 Components The OptiX RTN 620 is of a split structure, consisting of the IDU 620 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU 620 through an IF cable.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-1

1 Introduction to the Product

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

1.1 Positioning
The OptiX RTN 620 is a split radio transmission system developed by Huawei. It can provide a seamless radio transmission solution for the mobile communication network or private networks. The OptiX RTN 620 provides several types of service interfaces, and features flexible configuration and easy installation. In addition, the OptiX RTN 620 can provide a TDM microwave and Hybrid microwave integrated solution according to the network requirements, and supports the hybrid networking of microwave and optical fibers.
l

TDM radio transmission solution In the TDM radio transmission solution, the OptiX RTN 620 transmits TDM services at the E1, E3, and STM-1 levels, and Ethernet services in the manner of Ethernet over SDH or Ethernet over PDH.

Figure 1-1 TDM radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620

E1 E1 E1

E1

FE STM-1/ E1 STM-1/ E1 Regional Backhaul Network BSC

E1 FE FE E1

FE/ GE RNC

OptiX RTN 620

MSTP

BTS

NodeB

BSC

RNC

Hybrid radio transmission solution The OptiX RTN 620 supports an upgrade from the TDM radio transmission solution to the Hybrid radio transmission solution, and can transmit the Native E1 service and Native Ethernet service.

1-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction to the Product

Figure 1-2 Hybrid radio transmission solution provided by the OptiX RTN 620

FE FE E1 E1

E1 E1 STM-1/E1 E1 Regional Backhaul Network FE/GE GE

E1 FE E1 FE

OptiX RTN 620

NodeB

BTS

RNC

BSC

Radio and optical fiber hybrid networking solution The OptiX RTN 620 can be networked with other OptiX transmission products. Thus, it can provide an optical transmission and radio transmission seamlessly integrated solution to transmit SDH, PDH, and Ethernet services. Figure 1-3 Hybrid transmission network of the OptiX RTN 620 and other OptiX transmission products

STM-4 ring

SDH/PDH/ Ethernet

STM-1 ring

SDH/PDH/ Ethernet

OptiX RTN 620

MSTP

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-3

1 Introduction to the Product

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

1.2 Components
The OptiX RTN 620 is of a split structure, consisting of the IDU 620 and the ODU. Each ODU is connected to the IDU 620 through an IF cable.

IDU 620
The IDU 620 is the indoor unit of the OptiX RTN 620. It accesses services, performs multiplexing/demultiplexing and IF processing of the services, and provides system control and communication function. Table 1-1 provides the brief introduction to the IDU 620 . Table 1-1 Brief introduction to the IDU 620 Item Chassis height Pluggable Service interfaces Ethernet processing capability Performance 2U Supported E1, E3, STM-1o, STM-1e, STM-4, FE, GE
l l

Supports the VLAN and QinQ. Supports the transparent transmission, supports EPL, EVPL, EPLAN, and EVPLAN. Supports QoS (including CAR, CoS, and shaping) functions, traffic classification based on VLAN ID, IEEE 802.1p, and DSCP, eight priority queues, and SP + WRR queue scheduling. Supports Ethernet OAM based on IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. Supports the LAG. Supports the LPT. Supports the Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS) protection. Supports the Ethernet over SDH or Ethernet over PDH. Supports synchronous Ethernet.

l l l

l l

Number of microwave directions RF configuration mode

1 to 4
l l l l l

1+0 non-protection configuration N+0 non-protection configuration (N4) 1+1 protection configuration N+1 protection configuration (N = 2 or N = 3) XPIC configuration
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

1-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction to the Product

NOTE

The Hybrid microwave and the PDH microwave do not support the N+1 protection configuration and the XPIC configuration.

Figure 1-4 IDU 620

ODU
The ODU is the outdoor unit of the OptiX RTN 620. It performs frequency conversion and amplification of signals. The OptiX RTN 620 provide a complete ODU solution, and support an entire frequency band from 6 GHz to 38 GHz. OptiX RTN 620 supports the RTN 600 ODUand RTN XMC ODU. The OptiX RTN 620 supports three series ODU: standard power, high power, and low capacity for PDH to meet the requirements of different scenarios.
NOTE

Unlike the other frequency bands that use 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz channel spacing, the 18 GHz frequency band uses 13.75 MHz, 27.5 MHz, or 55 MHz channel spacing correspondingly.

Table 1-2 RTN 600 ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620 Item Description Standard Power ODU ODU type Frequency band SP and SPA 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/38 GHz (SP ODU) 6/7/8/11/13/15/18/2 3 GHz (SPA ODU)
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

High Power ODU HP 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/28/32/38 GHz (HP ODU) 10/10.5 GHz (HP ODU)

Low Capacity for PDH ODU LP and LPA 7/8/11/13/15/18/23 GHz (LP ODU) 7/8/11/13/15/18/23/ 26/32/38 GHz (LPA ODU)
1-5

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1 Introduction to the Product

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Item

Description Standard Power ODU High Power ODU QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM Low Capacity for PDH ODU QPSK/16QAM

Microwave modulation mode

QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM/256QAM (SP ODU) QPSK/16QAM/ 32QAM/64QAM/ 128QAM (SPA ODU)

Channel spacing

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

7/14/28/40/56 MHz

3.5/7/14/28 MHz

Table 1-3 RTN XMC ODUs supported by the OptiX RTN 620 Item Description High Power ODU ODU type Frequency band Microwave modulation mode Channel spacing XMC-2 7/8/15/23 GHz QPSK/16QAM/32QAM/ 64QAM/128QAM/256QAM 7/14/28/56 MHz Low Capacity for PDH ODU XMC-1 7/8/15/23 GHz QPSK/16QAM 3.5/7/14/28 MHz

There are two methods of mounting the ODU and the antenna: direct mounting and separate mounting.
NOTE

The OptiX RTN 620 provides an entire frequency band antenna solution, and supports the single-polarized antenna and dual-polarized antenna with a diameter of 0.3 m to 3.7 m and the corresponding feeder system.
l

The direct mounting method is normally adopted when a small-diameter and singlepolarized antenna is used. In this situation, if one ODU is configured for one antenna, the ODU is directly mounted at the back of the antenna. If two ODUs are configured for one antenna, an RF signal combiner/splitter (hereinafter referred to as a hybrid coupler) must be mounted to connect the ODUs to the antenna. Figure 1-5 shows the direct mounting.

1-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

1 Introduction to the Product

Figure 1-5 Direct mounting

The separate mounting method is adopted when a double-polarized antenna or a largediameter and single-polarized antenna is used. Figure 1-6 shows the separate mounting. In this situation, a hybrid coupler can be mounted to enable two ODUs to share one feed boom. Figure 1-6 Separate mounting

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

1-7

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

2
About This Chapter
The IDU 620 is a 2U chassis with four layers and houses pluggable boards. 2.2 Installation Mode The IDU 620 chassis support multiple installation modes. 2.3 Installation Holes of the Chassis The IDU chassis is available in two types according to its installation holes.

Chassis

2.1 Chassis Structure The dimensions of the IDU 620 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 87 mm (width x depth x height). The IDU 620 has a four-layer structure and supports wind-cooling.

2.4 IDU Labels Labels, such as the product nameplate label, certificate of qualification label, ESD protection label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation warning label are on the IDU chassis and boards. You should know the meanings of the labels and perform operations according to the indications of the labels to prevent personal injury and damage to the equipment.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-1

2 Chassis

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

2.1 Chassis Structure


The dimensions of the IDU 620 are as follows: 442 mm x 220 mm x 87 mm (width x depth x height). The IDU 620 has a four-layer structure and supports wind-cooling. The and Figure 2-1 show the chassis structures of the IDU 620 respectively. Figure 2-1 IDU 620 chassis structure

2.2 Installation Mode


The IDU 620 chassis support multiple installation modes. The IIDU 620 can be installed as follows:
l l l l l l l

In a 300 mm ETSI cabinet In a 600 mm ETSI cabinet In a 450 mm 19-inch cabinet In a 600 mm 19-inch cabinet In an open cabinet On a wall On a desk

2.3 Installation Holes of the Chassis


The IDU chassis is available in two types according to its installation holes. The three groups of installation holes are used for the following three installation modes:
l l

Installing the IDU chassis in a cabinet Installing the IDU chassis in an open rack When you install the IDU chassis in an open rack, you can use the holes for the open rack or the holes for the cabinet depending on the actual situation.

2-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l l

2 Chassis

Installing the IDU chassis on the wall Figure 2-2 IDU 620 chassis with wall-mounting holes

Installation holes for the open rack

Installation holes for the cabinet

Installation holes for wall-mouting

2.4 IDU Labels


Labels, such as the product nameplate label, certificate of qualification label, ESD protection label, grounding label, laser safety class label, high temperature warning label, and operation warning label are on the IDU chassis and boards. You should know the meanings of the labels and perform operations according to the indications of the labels to prevent personal injury and damage to the equipment.

Label Description
Table 2-1 provides the description of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards. The actual labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Table 2-1 Description of the IDU labels Label
OptiX RTN 620
POWER RATING: -48 -60V ; 10A

Label Name Product nameplate label

Indication The product name and certification

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
N14036

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-3

2 Chassis

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Label
/QUALIFICATION CARD

Label Name Certificate of qualification label

Indication The equipment is qualified.

HUAWEI

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

FAN

IU7(IF) IU5(IF) IU3(PXC) IU1(PXC)

IU8(IF) IU6(IF) IU4(EXT)(TPS) IU2(SCC)

Board layout label

The boards that can be installed in each slot

ESD protection label

The equipment is sensitive to static electricity.

ESD
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

Laser safety class label

The power class of the laser source

Grounding label on the chassis body Grounding label on the mounting ear
! ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY

The grounding position in the chassis body

The grounding position in the mounting ear The air filter should be cleaned periodically. The fan blades should not be touched when the fan is rotating.

Periodic cleaning label Fan warning label

DON'T TOUCH THE FANLEAVESBEFORE THEYSLOW DOWN !

High temperature warning label

The board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board. The ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed.

! WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

Operation warning label

2-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

2 Chassis

Label

Label Name Operation guidance label

Indication The switch lever must be pulled outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
NOTE There may be no operation guidance label on the equipment that were delivered previously.

PULL

Label Position
Figure 2-3 shows the positions of the labels on the IDU chassis and boards by using the IDU 620 as an example. The actual positions of the labels may be different depending on the configurations of the chassis and boards. Figure 2-3 Positions of the IDU 620 labels
OptiX RTN 620
POWER RATING: -48 -60V ; 10A

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
N14036

FAN

IU7(IF) IU5(IF) IU3(PXC) IU1(PXC)

IU8(IF) IU6(IF) IU4(EXT)(TPS) IU2(SCC)

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

! WARNING -48V OUTPUT TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

/QUALIFICATION CARD

PULL

HUAWEI

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO.,LTD.

MADE IN CHINA

! ATTENTION
CLEAN PERIODICALLY

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

DON'T TOUCH THE FANLEAVESBEFORE THEYSLOW DOWN !

ESD

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2-5

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3
About This Chapter
The boards of each type are as follows:
l l l l l l l

Boards

The IDU 620 support the following types of boards: IF board, SDH board, PDH board, Ethernet board, integrated power cross-connect clock board, system control and communication board, and fan board.

IF board: IF1A/IF1B, IFX, IF0A/IF0B, IFH2 SDH board: SL4, SL1, SD1, SLE, SDE PDH board: PL3, PO1, PH1, PD1 Ethernet board: EFT4, EMS6, EFP6 Integrated power cross-connect clock board: PXC System control and communication board: SCC Fan board: FAN

3.1 Board Appearance The board dimensions of the IDU 620 are 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height). 3.2 Board Configuration The IDU 620 can implement different functions when it is configured with different types of boards. 3.3 IF1A/IF1B The IF1A/IF1B is the SDH intermediate frequency (IF) board. 3.4 IFX The IFX is a cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF board. 3.5 IF0A/IF0B The IF0A/IF0B is the PDH intermediate frequency board. 3.6 IFH2 The IFH2 is a hybrid IF board. 3.7 SL4
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-1

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

The SL4 is an SDH single-port STM-4 board. 3.8 SL1/SD1 The SL1 is an SDH single-port STM-1 board. The SD1 is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board. 3.9 SLE/SDE The SLE is an SDH single-port electrical STM-1 board and the SDE is an SDH dual-port electrical STM-1 board. 3.10 PL3 The PL3 is a 3xE3/T3 tributary board. 3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1 The PO1 is an 8xE1 tributary board. The PH1 is a 16xE1 tributary board.The PD1 is a 32xE1 tributary board. 3.12 EFT4 The EFT4 is a 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board. 3.13 EMS6 The EMS6 is a 4-Port RJ-45 + 2-Port SFP Fast Ethernet / Gigabit Ethernet Switching Processing Board. 3.14 EFP6 The EFP6 is a 6-port Fast Ethernet EoPDH processing board. 3.15 PXC The PXC is an integrated power cross-connect clock board. 3.16 SCC The SCC is a system control and communication board. 3.17 Fan Tray Assembly The IDU 620 adopts wind-cooling and thus is configured with the fan tray assembly.

3-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.1 Board Appearance


The board dimensions of the IDU 620 are 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height). Figure 3-1 Board appearance

On the front panel of the board, there are two ejector levers and two captive screws. The ejector levers are used to insert and remove the boards. The captive screws are used to fasten the board. The bar code of the board is attached to one of the two ejector levers.In the case of the EMS6 board, a label indicating the MAC address is affixed on one ejector lever of the board. Figure 3-2 Board bar code
Bar code

0514721055000015-SL61SD101


NOTE

Inner code Board version Board name Board feature code

The board feature code of an optical interface board is used to indicate the type of the optical interface on the board. The board feature code of an E1 interface board is used to indicate the impedance of the interface on the board. For a detailed description of the board feature code, refer to the description of each board in the document.

3.2 Board Configuration


The IDU 620 can implement different functions when it is configured with different types of boards.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-3

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Figure 3-3 IDU 620 configuration


EXT/IF FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT/IF EXT/IF EXT SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT/IF PXC PXC

NOTE

EXT refers to the extended slot for a service board. IF refers to the slot for an IF board.

Table 3-1 List of boards on the IDU 620 Board Name PXC Full Name Integrated power crossconnect clock board Valid Slot Slot 1/3 Description Accesses one input of -48 V/-60 V DC power. Provides a full timeslot crossconnection for VC-12/VC-3/ VC-4 services equivalent to 16x16 VC-4. Supports the input and output of one external clock signal. SCC System control and communication board Slot 2 Integrates an EOW subboard, occupying the logical slot 21. Provides the NM interface, external alarm interface, synchronous/asynchronous data interface, and orderwire interface. IF1A IF1B IF0A IF0B SDH intermediate frequency board PDH intermediate frequency board Slot 5/6/7/8 Provides one IF interface. The logical slot number of the ODU that is connected to the IF board is 10 plus the slot number of the IF board. The IF1A and IF1B boards support the TU-based and STM-1 based microwave frame formats for establishing microwave links between two sets of IDU 620. The IF0A and IF0B boards support the E1-based microwave frame format for establishing microwave links with the IDU 605 1D/2D.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Slot 5/6/7/8

3-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Board Name IFX

Full Name XPIC intermediate frequency board

Valid Slot Slot 5/6/7/8

Description Provides one IF interface. The logical slot number of the ODU that is connected to the IF board is 10 plus the slot number of the IF board. Provides the XPIC function. Provides the STM-1 based microwave frame structure.

IFH2

Hybrid intermediate frequency board

Slot 5/6/7/8

Provides one IF interface. The logical slot number of the ODU that is connected to the IF board is 10 plus the slot number of the IF board. Provides one FE/GE electrical interface for accessing Ethernet services. Supports the AM function.

SL4

SDH single-port STM-4 board SDH single-port STM-1 board SDH dual-port STM-1 board SDH single-port STM-1 electrical board SDH dual-port STM-1 electrical board 3xE3/T3 tributary board 8xE1 tributary board 16xE1 tributary board 32xE1 tributary board

Slot 6/8

Uses the SFP optical module to provide one STM-4 optical interface. Uses the SFP optical module to provide one STM-1 optical interface. Uses the SFP optical module to provide two STM-1 optical interfaces. Provides one 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interface. Provides two 75-ohm STM-1 electrical interfaces.

SL1

Slot 4/5/6/7/8

SD1

SLE SDE PL3 PO1 PH1 PD1

Slot 4/5/6/7/8

Provides three 75-ohm E3/T3 electrical interfaces. Provides eight 75/120-ohm E1 interfaces. Provides 16 75/120-ohm E1 interfaces. Provides 32 75/120-ohm E1 interfaces.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-5

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Board Name EFT4

Full Name 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission processing board

Valid Slot Slot 4/5/6/7/8

Description Provides a 4x10/100BASE-T(X) interface for processing Ethernet transparent transmission services. The maximum uplink bandwidth of the board is 2xVC-4. Provides four FE electrical interfaces. The other two ports use SFP optical/electrical modules for providing two GE optical/electrical interfaces. The GE electrical interface is compatible with the FE electrical interface. Supports the transparently transmitted Ethernet services and Layer 2 switching services. The maximum uplink bandwidth of the board is 2xVC-4.

EMS6

4-port RJ-45 + 2-port SFP Fast Ethernet/ Gigabit Ethernet switching processing board

EFP6

6-port RJ-45 Fast Ethernet EoPDH switching processing board

Slot 4/5/6/7/8

Provides six FE electrical interfaces. Provides the EoPDH processing function. Supports the transparently transmitted Ethernet services and Layer 2 switching services. The uplink bandwidth of the board is 63xE1.

FAN

Fan board

Slot 20

Provides wind cooling for the IDU 620.

3.3 IF1A/IF1B
The IF1A/IF1B is the SDH intermediate frequency (IF) board. 3.3.1 Version Description The functional version of the IF1A/IF1B is SL61. 3.3.2 Functions and Features The IF1A/IF1B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF1A/IF1B board supports the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working principle of the IF1A/IF1B.
3-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.3.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel. 3.3.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the IF1A/IF1B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.3.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes and J1 byte. The wayside service attributes and J1 bytes apply to SDH microwave only. The other parameters apply to both PDH and SDH microwaves. 3.3.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance of modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.3.1 Version Description


The functional version of the IF1A/IF1B is SL61.

3.3.2 Functions and Features


The IF1A/IF1B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF1A/IF1B board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.

IF Processing
l l l l l

Maps PDH service signals and SDH service signals into microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals. Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

Overhead Processing
l l l l l l

Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the higher order path overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte in SDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.
NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode. The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified. The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default, the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-7

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Pointer Processing
l l

Processes the AU pointer in SDH microwave signals. Processes the TU pointer in PDH microwave signals.

Protection Processing
l l l l

Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching. Supports N+1 protection. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
NOTE

For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Alarms and Performance Events


l l

Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Features
l l l l l l

Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port. Supports inloop on the VC-4 path. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.3.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working principle of the IF1A/IF1B.
3-8 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-4 Block diagram of the IF1A/IF1B working principle
Backplane SMODEM unit SCC Paired boards PXC

IF

Combiner interface unit

IF processing unit

MODEM unit

MUX/ DEMUX unit

Logic processing unit

SCC

SCC Clock unit Service bus Overhead bus Power unit Microwave service signal Control bus Logic control unit ODU control signal Channel switching signal

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-2 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF1A/IF1B Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal.
l l

Demodulates the ODU control signal. Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port of the SCC CPU. Controls the level of the service signal through the automatic gain control (AGC) circuit. Filters the signal. Performs A/D conversion. Performs digital demodulation. Performs time domain adaptive equalization. Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms.

IF processing unit

l l

MODEM unit

l l l

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-9

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Proced ure 5

Functional Module MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)

Processing Flow
l

Synchronizes frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. Performs descrambling. Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Checks the Link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the SCC. Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports them to the SCC through the control bus. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. Checks higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal into the logic processing unit.

l l

3-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Proced ure

Functional Module MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing)

Processing Flow
l

Detects the PDH microwave frame header and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Verifies the check code and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the Link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports them to the SCC through the control bus. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Adjusts the TU pointer. Maps the TU-12s into the specified position in the VC-4. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overhead of an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the 8M signal. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

l l

Logic processing unit

l l

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-3 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF1A/IF1B Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l

Processes the clock signal. Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-11

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Proced ure 2

Functional Module MUX/DEMUX unit (for SDH microwave signal processing)

Processing Flow
l l l l l

Sets higher order path overheads. Sets the AU pointer. Sets multiplex section overheads. Sets regenerator section overheads. Performs scrambling. Demaps TU-12s from the VC-4 signal. Sets PDH microwave frame overheads. Performs scrambling. Performs FEC coding. Performs digital modulation. Performs D/A conversion. Performs analog modulation.

MUX/DEMUX unit (for PDH microwave signal processing) MODEM unit

l l l

l l

IF processing unit

l l

5 6

SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit

Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted from the SCC. Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service signal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.

3.3.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-5 IF1A front panel
IF1A
IF
STAT SRV LINK ODU BER RMT ACT
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

3-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

IF1A

ODU-PWR

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-6 IF1B front panel


IF1B
IF
STAT SRV LINK ODU BER RMT ACT
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

Indicators
Table 3-4 IF1A/IF1B indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms, or has no power access. The ODU has minor alarms. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold.

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green) On (red)

On (yellow) On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms BER On (yellow)

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

IF1B

ODU-PWR

3-13

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

Status Off

Meaning The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).

RMT

On (yellow) Off

ACT

On (green)

Off

The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).

Interfaces
Table 3-5 IF1A/IF1B interface description Interface IF ODU-PWRa Description IF port ODU power switch Type of connector TNC Cable IF Jumper -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull out the switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel.
l

The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board. The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-14

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


NOTE

3 Boards

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were delivered previously.

3.3.5 Valid Slots


In the IDU 620, the IF1A/IF1B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-7 Slots of the IF1A/IF1B in the IDU 620
EXT IF1A/IF1B FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT IF1A/IF1B EXT IF1A/IF1B EXT SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT IF1A/IF1B PXC PXC

Table 3-6 Slot assigning principle of the IF1A/IF1B Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

3.3.6 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes and J1 byte. The wayside service attributes and J1 bytes apply to SDH microwave only. The other parameters apply to both PDH and SDH microwaves.

Radio Work Mode


The IF board can operate in the following seven radio work modes. Table 3-7 Radio work modes Service Capacity 4xE1 4xE1 8xE1 8xE1 16xE1
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Modulation Scheme QPSK 16QAM QPSK 16QAM QPSK

Channel Spacing (MHz) 7 3.5 14 (13.75) 7 28 (27.5)


3-15

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Service Capacity 16xE1 22xE1 26xE1 35xE1 44xE1 53xE1 E3 E3 STM-1

Modulation Scheme 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM QPSK 16QAM 128QAM

Channel Spacing (MHz) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l l

The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 620. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported.

Radio Link ID
The radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuously sends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constant connection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarm is reported on the corresponding IF port.

Wayside Service Attributes


When the IF board works in the STM-1 mode, one wayside service can be transported by radio. The following are the two parameters of wayside services:
l

2M wayside Enable Status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the 2M wayside service. By default, the 2M wayside service is disabled.

2M wayside input board This parameter determines through which PXC the wayside service is accessed.

ATPC Attributes
ATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter according to the attenuation of the received signal level (RSL) at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:
l

ATPC enable status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control the transmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

3-16

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l

3 Boards

ATPC upper threshold When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

ATPC lower threshold When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

ATPC adjustment This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment. Automatic ATPC threshold setting This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. The equipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme. When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold are used.
NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

J1 Byte
The board supports four modes, which are as follows:
l l l l

Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.3.7 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including baseband signal processing performance of modem, IF performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance
Table 3-8 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz)
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Performance

350

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-17

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Item Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

Performance 140 50

ASK 5.5 10

Baseband signal processing performance of the modem


Table 3-9 Baseband signal processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Performance
l l

Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding for PDH signals Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding for SDH signals

Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals

Supported

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-10 Integrated system performance of the IF1A/IF1B Item Description IF1A Dimensions Weight Power consumption IF1B

203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 420 g < 12.2 W 400 g

3.4 IFX
The IFX is a cross-polarization interference cancellation (XPIC) IF board. 3.4.1 Version Description
3-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The functional version of the IFX is SL61. 3.4.2 Functions and Features The IFX receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFX can cancel the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal. The IFX board supports the DC-C power distribution mode. 3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one IF signal in the XPIC mode as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX. The working principle and signal flow of the IFX in the non-XPIC mode are the same as the working principle and signal flow of the IF1A/ IF1B. 3.4.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.4.5 Valid Slots The IFX can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. 3.4.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes, XPIC attribute, and J1 byte. 3.4.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.4.1 Version Description


The functional version of the IFX is SL61.

3.4.2 Functions and Features


The IFX receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFX can cancel the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal. The IFX board supports the DC-C power distribution mode.

IF Processing
l l l l l l

Maps VC-4 service signals into SDH microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes SDH microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates SDH microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals. Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies. Cancels the cross-polarization interference in the IF signal in the XPIC mode.
NOTE

When the XPIC function and the co-channel dual-polarization (CCDP) function are used, the transmission capacity doubles under the same channel conditions.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-19

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Overhead Processing
l l l l l

Processes the overheads. Processes the regenerator section overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Processes the multiplex section overheads of the SDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the J1/C2 byte in SDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.
NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode. The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified. The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default, the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing
Processes the AU pointer in SDH microwave signals.

Protection Processing
l l l l

Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching. Supports N+1 protection. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the setting of SNCP switching conditions.
NOTE

For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Alarms and Performance Events


l l

Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Features
l l l l

Supports inloop on the VC-4 path. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the boards. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-20

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l

3 Boards

Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.


NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System IMaintenance Guide. When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.4.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one IF signal in the XPIC mode as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFX. The working principle and signal flow of the IFX in the non-XPIC mode are the same as the working principle and signal flow of the IF1A/ IF1B.

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-8 Block diagram of the IFX working principle
Backplane SMODEM unit SCC XPIC Paired boards 1+1HSB/FD/SD Paired boards PXC Logic proces sing unit

IF

Combiner interface unit

IF processing unit

MODEM unit

MUX/ DEMUX unit

SCC

SCC Power unit Microwave service signal Control bus Power unit ODU control signal Channel switching signal

Clock unit Service bus Overhead bus XPIC signal

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-21

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-11 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFX Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal.
l l

Demodulates the ODU control signal. Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port of the SCC CPU. Controls the level of the service signal through the AGC circuit. Filters the signal and splits the signal into two channels.

IF processing unit

Performs A/D conversion for one filtered signal and transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit. Outputs the other filtered signal as the XPIC signal.

Performs A/D conversion for the XPIC signal from the paired IFX and transmits the converted signal to the MODEM unit. Performs digital demodulation by using the XPIC IF signal from the paired IFX as a reference signal. Performs time domain adaptive equalization. Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms.

MODEM unit

l l

3-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Proced ure 5

Functional Module MUX/DEMUX unit

Processing Flow
l

Synchronizes frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. Performs descrambling. Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Checks the Link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the SCC. Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports them to the SCC through the control bus. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Extracts the wayside service bytes to form another 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. Checks higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal into the logic processing unit. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overhead of an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the 8M signal. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

l l

Logic processing unit

l l

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-23

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-12 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFX Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l

Processes the clock signal. Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC board. Sets higher order path overheads. Sets the AU pointer. Sets multiplex section overheads. Sets regenerator section overheads. Performs scrambling. Performs FEC coding. Performs digital modulation. Performs D/A conversion. Performs analog modulation.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l l l l l

MODEM unit

l l

IF processing unit

l l

5 6

SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit

Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted from the SCC board. Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service signal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.

3.4.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, an IF port, XPIC signal ports, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

3-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-9 IFX front panel
IFX
IF
STAT SRV XPIC LINK ODU RMT ACT
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

IN

OUT

PULL

Indicators
Table 3-13 IFX indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms, or has no power access.
3-25

XPIC

On (green) On (red) Off

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green) On (red)

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

IFX

XPIC

ODU-PWR

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

Status On (yellow) On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms

Meaning The ODU has minor alarms. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).

RMT

On (yellow) Off

ACT

On (green)

Off

The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).

Interfaces
Table 3-14 IFX interface description Interface IF XPIC IN OUT ODU-PWRa Description IF port XPIC input signal XPIC output signal ODU power switch Type of connector TNC SMA Cable IF Jumper XPIC cable

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull out the switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel.

3-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l

3 Boards

The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board. The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were delivered previously.

3.4.5 Valid Slots


The IFX can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. Figure 3-10 Slots of the IFX in the IDU 620
EXT IFX FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT IFX EXT IFX EXT SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT IFX PXC PXC

Table 3-15 Slot assigning principle of the IFX Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

3.4.6 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, wayside service attributes, ATPC attributes, XPIC attribute, and J1 byte.

Radio Work Mode


The IFX supports only one radio work mode. Table 3-16 Radio work mode Service Capacity STM-1 Modulation Scheme 128QAM Channel Spacing (MHz) 28 (27.5)

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-27

3 Boards
NOTE

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

l l

27.5 MHz is the channel spacing of the 18 GHz frequency band. The channel spacing described in the table is the minimum channel spacing supported by the equipment. The channel spacing larger than the value is also supported.

Radio Link ID
The radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuously sends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constant connection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarm is reported on the corresponding IF port.

Wayside Service Attributes


When the IF board works in the STM-1 mode, one wayside service can be transported on radio. The following are the two parameters of wayside services:
l

2M wayside Enable Status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the 2M wayside service. By default, the 2M wayside service is disabled.

2M wayside input board This parameter determines through which PXC the wayside service is accessed.

ATPC Attributes
ATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter according to the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:
l

ATPC enable status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control the transmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

ATPC upper threshold When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

ATPC lower threshold When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

ATPC adjustment This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment. Automatic ATPC threshold setting This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. The equipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme. When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold are used.
NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

3-28

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

XPIC Attributes
The XPIC enabled parameter can be set to enabled or disabled.
l

When the XPIC function is enabled, the IFX splits the received IF signal, outputs one signal to the XPIC OUT port, and performs XPIC by using the reference IF signal from the XPIC IN port. When the XPIC function is disabled, the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port must be looped back by using an XPIC cable.

J1 Byte
The board supports four modes, which are as follows:
l l l l

Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.4.7 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, XPIC performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance
Table 3-17 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ASK 5.5 10 350 140 50 Performance

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-29

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem


Table 3-18 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Description Trellis-coded modulation (TCM) and RS two-level encoding Supported

XPIC Performance
Table 3-19 XPIC performance Item Cross polarization improvement factor (XPIF) Description 19 dB

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-20 Integrated system performance of the IFX Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 450 g < 14.5 W

3.5 IF0A/IF0B
The IF0A/IF0B is the PDH intermediate frequency board. 3.5.1 Version Description The functional version of the IF0A/IF0B is SL61. 3.5.2 Functions and Features The IF0A/IF0B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF0A/IF0B board supports the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF0A/IF0B.
3-30 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.5.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel. 3.5.5 Valid Slots The IF0A/IF0B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. 3.5.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, and ATPC attributes. 3.5.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.5.1 Version Description


The functional version of the IF0A/IF0B is SL61.

3.5.2 Functions and Features


The IF0A/IF0B receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IF0A/IF0B board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.

IF Processing
l l l l l

Multiplexes 2xE1/5xE1/10xE1/16xE1 service signals into PDH microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes PDH microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates PDH microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals. Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

Overhead Processing
l l

Processes the overheads of the PDH microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

Protection Processing
l l

Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.


NOTE

For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Alarms and Performance Events


l l

Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm threshold.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-31

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3 Boards
l

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Features
l l l l l

Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the boards. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.5.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IF0A/IF0B.

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-11 Block diagram of the IF0A/IF0B working principle
Backplane SMODEM unit SCC Paired boards PXC

IF

Combiner interface unit

IF processing unit

MODEM unit

MUX/ DEMUX unit

Logic processing unit

SCC

SCC Clock unit Service bus Overhead bus Power unit Microwave service signal Control bus Logic control unit ODU control signal Channel switching signal

3-32

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-21 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IF0A/IF0B Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal.
l l

Demodulates the ODU control signal. Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port of the SCC CPU. Controls the level of the service signal through the AGC circuit. Filters the signal. Performs A/D conversion. Performs digital modulation. Performs time domain adaptive equalization. Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms. Detects the PDH microwave frame header and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Verifies the check code and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the Link ID and generates the corresponding alarms. Detects the changes in the ATPC message and the microwave RDI, and reports them to the SCC through the control bus. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, and DCC bytes from the PDH microwave frame to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Maps the E1 signal in the PDH microwave frame into the specified position in the VC-4. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overhead of an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the 8M signal. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC board.

IF processing unit

l l

MODEM unit

l l l

MUX/DEMUX unit

Logic processing unit

l l

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-33

3 Boards
NOTE

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-22 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IF0A/IF0B Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l

Processes the clock signal. Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal. Sets PDH microwave frame overheads. Performs scrambling. Performs FEC coding. Performs digital modulation. Performs D/A conversion. Performs analog modulation.

MUX/DEMUX unit

l l l

MODEM unit

l l

IF processing unit

l l

5 6

SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit

Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted from the SCC board. Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service signal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.

3.5.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, an IF port, and an ODU power switch on the front panel.

3-34

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-12 IF0A front panel
IF0A
IF
STAT SRV LINK ODU BER RMT ACT
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

Figure 3-13 IF0B front panel


IF0B
IF
STAT SRV LINK ODU BER RMT ACT
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

Indicators
Table 3-23 IF0A/IF0B indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally.

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green)

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

IF0B

ODU-PWR

IF0A

ODU-PWR

3-35

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

Status On (red)

Meaning The ODU has critical or major alarms, or has no power access. The ODU has minor alarms. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold. The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).

On (yellow) On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms BER On (yellow) Off RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)

Off

The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).

Interfaces
Table 3-24 IF0A/IF0B interface description Interface IF ODU-PWRa Description IF port ODU power switch Type of connector TNC Cable IF Jumper -

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull out the switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

3-36

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel.
l

The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board. The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were delivered previously.

3.5.5 Valid Slots


The IF0A/IF0B can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. Figure 3-14 Slots of the IF0A/IF0B in the IDU 620
EXT IF0A/IF0B FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT IF0A/IF0B IF0A/IF0B EXT EXT SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

IF0A/IF0B EXT PXC PXC

Table 3-25 Slot assigning principle of the IF0A/IF0B Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 5 > slot 7 > slot 8 > slot 6

3.5.6 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, and ATPC attributes.

Radio Work Mode


The IF0A/IF0B can operate in the following four radio work modes.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-37

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 3-26 Radio work modes Service Capacity 2xE1 5xE1 10xE1 16xE1 Modulation Scheme QPSK QPSK QPSK QPSK Channel Spacing (MHz) 3.5 7 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5)

NOTE

l l l

13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are the channel spacings of the 18 GHz frequency band. The channel spacing described in the table is the minimum channel spacing supported by the equipment. The channel spacing larger than the value is also supported. The 2xE1 work mode does not support 1+1 protection.

Radio Link ID
The radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuously sends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constant connection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarm is reported on the corresponding IF port.

ATPC Attributes
ATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter according to the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:
l

ATPC enable status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control the transmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

ATPC upper threshold When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

ATPC lower threshold When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

ATPC adjustment This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment. Automatic ATPC threshold setting This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. The equipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme. When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold are used.

3-38

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


NOTE

3 Boards

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

3.5.7 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance
Table 3-27 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) ASK 5.5 10 350 140 50 Performance

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem


Table 3-28 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Description Reed-Solomon (RS) encoding Supported

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-39

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-29 Integrated system performance of the IF0A/IF0B Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 520 g < 13.7 W

3.6 IFH2
The IFH2 is a hybrid IF board. 3.6.1 Version Description The functional version of the IFH2 is SL61. 3.6.2 Functions and Features The IFH2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFH2 supports the hybrid transmission of E1 services and Ethernet services. The IFH2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode. 3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFH2. When the IFH2 works in pure PDH microwave mode, the IFH2 need not process Ethernet services. 3.6.4 Front Panel There are indicators, an IF port, a GE port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.6.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the IFH2 can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.6.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, ATPC attributes, AM attributes, and Ethernet parameters. 3.6.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, Ethernet interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.6.1 Version Description


The functional version of the IFH2 is SL61.

3.6.2 Functions and Features


The IFH2 receives and transmits one IF signal, and provides the management channel to the ODU and the -48 V power that the ODU requires. The IFH2 supports the hybrid transmission
3-40 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

of E1 services and Ethernet services. The IFH2 board supports the DC-I power distribution mode.

IF Processing
l

Supports the Hybrid microwave frame and supports the pure transmission of the E1 or Ethernet signals and the hybrid transmission of the E1 and Ethernet signals. Supports the adaptive modulation (AM). Maps service signals into microwave frame signals. Codes and decodes microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates microwave frame signals. Modulates and demodulates ODU control signals. Combines and splits service signals, ODU control signals, and -48 V power supplies.

l l l l l l

Ethernet Service Processing


The front panel of the IFH2 has a GE electrical interface. The GE electrical interface supports the following port functions:
l

Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working modes supported are 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and autonegotiation. Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length of 1966 bytes. Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.

The GE electrical interface also supports the following Ethernet QoS functions:
l l

Supports the flow classification function that complies with IEEE 802.1p. Schedules the queues of four priority levels in the strict-priority (SP) mode.

Overhead Processing
l l

Processes the overheads of the microwave signals. Supports the setting and querying of the Link ID.

Protection Processing
l l

Supports 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection. Supports 1+1 FD/SD hitless switching.


NOTE

When the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection is configured in the Hybrid microwave, the two IFH2 boards must work with one EMS6 board. As shown in Figure 3-15, the GE ports of the main and standby IFH2 boards are connected to two Ethernet ports of the EMS6 boards through network cables. The two Ethernet ports of the EMS6 board must be configured as a Link Aggregation Group. For the details of 1+1 HSB, 1+1 FD and 1+1 SD, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-41

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Figure 3-15 Cable connection for the 1+1 HSB/FD/SD protection in the Hybrid microwave
Network cable To the external equipment Slot 8 Slot 6 Slot 4

IFH2 FAN
Slot 20

Slot 7 Slot 5 Slot 3 Slot 1

EMS6

IFH2 PXC PXC

SCC

Slot 2

IDU 620

Alarms and Performance Events


l l

Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Features
l l l l l l l

Supports inloop and outloop at the IF port. Supports the PRBS bit error test at the IF port. Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.6.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one hybrid microwave IF signal as an example to describe the working principle and signal flow of the IFH2. When the IFH2 works in pure PDH microwave mode, the IFH2 need not process Ethernet services.
3-42 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-16 Block diagram of the IFH2 working principle
Backplane SMODEM unit SCC Paired board Logic processing unit PXC

IF

Combiner interface unit

IF processing unit

MODEM unit

MUX/ DEMUX unit

SCC

GE

Ethernet processing unit

SCC Clock unit Service bus Overhead bus Ethernet service signal Power unit Microwave service signal Control bus Logic control unit ODU control signal Channel switching signal

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-30 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the IFH2 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Combiner interface unit SMODEM unit Processing Flow Divides the ODU control signal and the microwave service signal from the IF signal.
l l

Demodulates the ODU control signal. Transmits the ODU control signal to the serial port of the SCC CPU. Controls the level of the service signal through the AGC circuit. Filters the signal. Performs A/D conversion.

IF processing unit

l l

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-43

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Proced ure 4

Functional Module MODEM unit

Processing Flow
l l l

Performs digital demodulation. Performs time domain adaptive equalization. Performs FEC decoding and generates the corresponding alarms. Detects the hybrid microwave frame header and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Verifies the check code in the hybrid microwave frame and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the Link ID in the hybrid microwave frame and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the changes in the ATPC message in the hybrid microwave frame and the changes in the microwave RDI, and reports the changes to the SCC through the control bus. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, SSM byte, and DCC bytes from the hybrid microwave frame to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Maps the E1 signal in the hybrid microwave frame into the specified position in the VC-4 and sends the VC-4 signal to the logic processing unit. Sends the Ethernet service signal in the hybrid microwave frame to the Ethernet processing unit. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overhead of an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the 8M signal. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

MUX/DEMUX unit

Logic processing unit

l l

Ethernet processing unit

Classifies Ethernet service packets into four queues that have different priorities according to IEEE 802.1p. Schedules the services in strict-priority (SP) mode and sends the services through the Ethernet interface.

NOTE

In 1+1 FD/SD, the MUX/DEMUX unit sends the service signal to the MUX/DEMUX unit of the paired board. The MUX/DEMUX unit selects a better signal for later processing.

3-44

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-31 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the IFH2 Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l

Processes the clock signal. Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Performs Ethernet performance counting for the accessed FE/GE signal. Classifies the packets into four queues that have different priorities according to IEEE 802.1p and schedules the services in SP mode. Sends the Ethernet signals to the MUX/DEMUX unit. Demaps E1 signals from the VC-4 signal. Sets hybrid microwave frame overheads. Combines the E1 signals, Ethernet signals, and microwave frame overheads to form microwave frames. Performs FEC coding. Performs digital modulation. Performs D/A conversion. Performs analog modulation.

Ethernet processing unit

MUX/DEMUX unit

l l l

MODEM unit

l l

IF processing unit

l l

5 6

SMODEM unit Combiner interface unit

Modulates the ODU control signal that is transmitted from the SCC. Combines the ODU control signal, microwave service signal, and -48 V power supplies, and sends them to the IF cable.

Control Signal Processing Flow


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-45

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3.6.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, an IF port, a GE port, an ODU power switch, and labels on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-17 IFH2 front panel
IFH2
IF
STAT SRV LINK ODU BER RMT ACT
! WARNING -48V OUTPUT
TURN OFF POWER BEFORE DISCONNECTING IF CABLE

PULL

GE

Indicators
Table 3-32 IFH2 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms, or has no power access. The ODU has minor alarms. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms

BER

On (yellow)

3-46

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

IFH2

ODU-PWR

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

Status Off

Meaning The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).

RMT

On (yellow) Off

ACT

On (green)

Off

The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).

Interfaces
Table 3-33 IFH2 interface description Interface IF ODU-PWRa GE Description IF port ODU power switch GE electrical port Type of connector TNC RJ-45 Cable IF Jumper Network cable

NOTE

a: The ODU-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull out the switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

The GE port of the IFH2 supports the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing mode. For the front view and pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-18 and refer to Table 3-34 and Table 3-35. Figure 3-18 RJ-45 front view

87654321

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-47

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 3-34 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Table 3-35 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ Function Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+)

3-48

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function -

1000BASE-T Signal BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (-)

Reserved

The GE port has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-36. Table 3-36 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description Indicator Green indicator (LINK) Status On Off Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label, an operation warning label, and an operation guidance label on the front panel.
l

The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board. The operation warning label suggests that the ODU-PWR switch must be turned off before the IF cable is removed. The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
NOTE

l l

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were delivered previously.

3.6.5 Valid Slots


In the IDU 620, the IFH2 can be installed in slots 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-19 Slots of the IFH2 in the IDU 620
EXT IFH2 FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT IFH2 EXT IFH2 EXT SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT IFH2 PXC PXC

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-49

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 3-37 Slot assigning principle of the IFH2 Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 5 > Slot 7 > Slot 8 > Slot 6

3.6.6 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: the radio work mode, radio Link ID, ATPC attributes, AM attributes, and Ethernet parameters.

Radio Work Mode


Table 3-38 Radio work modes in the case of hybrid microwave frames Channel Spacing (MHz)a, b 7 7 7 7 7 7 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 14 (13.75) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) 28 (27.5) Modulation Scheme QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM Service Capacity (Mbit/s) 10 20 25 32 38 44 20 42 51 66 78 90 42 84 105 133 158 Maximum Number of E1s in servicec 5 10 12 15 18 21 10 20 24 31 37 43 20 40 50 64 75

3-50

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Channel Spacing (MHz)a, b 28 (27.5) 56 56 56 56 56 56 40d

Modulation Scheme 256QAM QPSK 16QAM 32QAM 64QAM 128QAM 256QAM 64QAM

Service Capacity (Mbit/s) 183 84 168 208 265 313 363 -

Maximum Number of E1s in servicec 75 40 75 75 75 75 75 75

NOTE

l l l

a: The channel spacings 13.75 MHz and 27.5 MHz are applied to the 18 GHz frequency band. b: The channel spacings listed in the table are the minimum channel spacings supported by the OptiX RTN 620. The channel spacings larger than the values are also supported. c: The E1 services consume the corresponding bandwidth of the service capacity. After the E1 service capacity is deducted from the service capacity, the remaining bandwidth of the service capacity can be used for the Ethernet services. d: This modes are the super PDH modes that do not support the transmission of Ethernet services.

Radio Link ID
The radio Link ID is an identification of the microwave link. The transmit end continuously sends the radio Link ID byte, so that the receive end can learn that the transmit end is in a constant connection state. If the receive end detects a mismatch of the radio Link ID, the MW_LIM alarm is reported on the corresponding IF port.

ATPC Attributes
ATPC is a technology that automatically adjusts the transmit power of the transmitter according to the attenuation of the RSL at the receive end. The following are the parameters of ATPC:
l

ATPC enable status This parameter determines whether the NE enables the ATPC function to control the transmit power of the transmitter. By default, the ATPC function is disabled.

ATPC upper threshold When the RSL at the receive end is higher than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of reducing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The decrement depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.

ATPC lower threshold

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-51

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

When the RSL at the receive end is lower than this parameter, the receive end notifies the transmit end of increasing the transmit power by using the ATPC overhead in the microwave frame. The increment depends on the value of the ATPC adjustment parameter.
l

ATPC adjustment This parameter determines the decrement/increment of an ATPC adjustment. Automatic ATPC threshold setting This parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled. When this parameter is set to Enabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold do not take effect. The equipment sets the ATPC thresholds automatically according to the IF modulation scheme. When this parameter is set to Disabled, the preset ATPC upper threshold and ATPC lower threshold are used.
NOTE

ATPC adjustment cannot exceed the range of the ODU transmit power.

AM Attributes
The AM is a technology used to automatically adjust the modulation scheme based on the quality of channels. The AM attributes include the following parameters:
l

AM Enable Status This parameter determines whether the board enables the AM function to perform adaptive modulation. This parameter can be set to Enable or Disable.

IF Channel Bandwidth This parameter determines the channel spacing used in the case of adaptive modulation. This parameter can be set to 7 MHz, 14 MHz, 28 MHz, or 56 MHz.

Modulation mode of the assurred AM capacity This parameter specifies the lowest-gain modulation mode in the case of adaptive modulation. This parameter can be set to QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, or 256QAM.

Modulation mode of the full AM capacity This parameter specifies the highest-gain modulation mode in the case of adaptive modulation. This parameter can be set to QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM, 128QAM, or 256QAM.

E1 capacity This parameter specifies the number of E1s in the hybrid working mode. The number of E1s must not exceed the maximum number of E1s when the committed-capacity modulation scheme is used.

Ethernet Parameters
The parameters that you may frequently set for the GE port of the IFH2 are as follows:
l l

Basic attributes Flow control

The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following three parameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length.
l

Port enabled
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-52

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

This parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default, this parameter is set to disabled.
l

Working mode There are five working modes: 10M full-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation. Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working mode of the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

The board supports the following flow control modes: autonegotiation flow control mode and non-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of the equipment on the opposite side.
l

The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

Disabled The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode. Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames.

The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

Disabled The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode. Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames.

3.6.7 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including IF performance, modem performance, Ethernet interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

IF performance
Table 3-39 IF performance Item IF signal Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz) Impedance (ohm) ODU O&M signal Modulation mode
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Performance

350 140 50

ASK
3-53

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Item Transmit frequency of the IF board (MHz) Receive frequency of the IF board (MHz)

Performance 5.5 10

Baseband Signals Processing Performance of the Modem


Table 3-40 Baseband signals processing performance of the modem Item Encoding mode Adaptive timedomain equalizer for baseband signals Description Low-density parity check code (LDPC) encoding Supported

10/100/1000BASE-T(X) Interface Performance


The 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-41 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ-45

3-54

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-42 Integrated system performance of the IFH2 Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 580 g < 16.4 W

3.7 SL4
The SL4 is an SDH single-port STM-4 board. 3.7.1 Version Description The functional version of the SL4 is SL61. 3.7.2 Functions and Features The SL4 receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals. 3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the SL4. 3.7.4 Front Panel There are indicators, STM-4 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel. 3.7.5 Valid Slots The SL4 can be installed in slots 6 and 8 of the IDU 620. 3.7.6 Board Feature Code The type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. 3.7.7 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte. 3.7.8 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including STM-4 optical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.7.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SL4 is SL61.

3.7.2 Functions and Features


The SL4 receives and transmits 1xSTM-4 optical signals.

Optical Interface Specifications


l

The SL4 provides S-4.1, L-4.1, or L-4.2 optical interfaces.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-55

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3 Boards
l

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

The optical interface complies with ITU-T G.957.

Optical Module Specifications


l l l l

Adopts the SFP optical modules and provides LC fiber connectors. Supports the setting of turning on or shutting down the laser. Supports the querying of the technical parameters of the optical modules. Supports the reporting of the performance events related to the transmit optical power and receive optical power. Supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
NOTE

The ALS functions as follows: 1. When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down. 2. The laser starts to launch an alternative laser pulse. The light is emitted for 2s after a 60s interval. 3. When the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser returns to the normal working state and emits light continuously.

Overhead Processing
l l l l

Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-4 signals. Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-4 signals. Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-4 signals. Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.
NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode. The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified. The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default, the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing
Processes AU pointers.

Protection Processing
l

Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in a linear MSP group. Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions. Supports the setting of the switching conditions for a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring. Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

l l l

3-56

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


NOTE

3 Boards

For the details of SNCP, two-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring, and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Alarms and Performance Events


l l

Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Features
l l l l l

Supports inloop and outloop at the optical interface. Supports outloop on the VC-4 path. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.7.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the SL4.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-57

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-20 Block diagram of the SL4 working principle
Backplane

Paired board

STM-4 STM-4

O/E conversion unit

Overhead processing unit

Logic processing unit

PXC SCC

SCC Logic control unit Service bus Overhead bus STM-4 signal Control bus

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-43 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL4 Proced ure 1 Functional Module O/E conversion unit Processing Flow
l l l

Regenerates STM-4 optical signals. Detects the R_LOS alarm. Converts the STM-4 optical signals into electrical signals.

3-58

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Proced ure 2

Functional Module Overhead processing unit

Processing Flow
l l

Restores the clock signal. Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. Performs descrambling. Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the SCC. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. Checks higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal into the logic processing unit. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

l l

Logic processing unit

l l

NOTE

If a two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring is configured, the overhead processing unit sends the overhead byte to the paired SL4 to realize the overhead pass-through function.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-59

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-44 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL4 Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l

Processes the clock signal. Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Sets higher order path overheads. Sets the AU pointer. Sets multiplex section overheads. Sets regenerator section overheads. Performs scrambling. Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

Overhead processing unit

l l l l l

O/E conversion unit

Control Signal Processing Flow


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.

3.7.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, STM-4 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-21 SL4 front panel
TX
STAT SRV LOS
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

RX

3-60

SL4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

SL4

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-45 SL4 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The optical interface of the SL4 reports the R_LOS alarm. The optical interface of the SL4 has no R_LOS alarm.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

LOS

On (red)

Off

Interfaces
Table 3-46 SL4 interface description Interface TX RX Description Transmit port of the STM-4 optical interface Receive port of the STM-4 optical interface Type of Connector LC (SFP) Cable Fiber jumper

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-61

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3.7.5 Valid Slots


The SL4 can be installed in slots 6 and 8 of the IDU 620. Figure 3-22 Slots of the SL4 in the IDU 620
EXT FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT SL4 EXT SL4 EXT SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT PXC PXC

3.7.6 Board Feature Code


The type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. Table 3-47 Board feature code of the SL4 Board Feature Code 01 02 03 Type of the Optical Module S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2 Part Number of the Optical Module 34060277 34060280 34060284

3.7.7 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

J0 Byte
The board supports three modes, which are as follows:
l l l

Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 Byte
The board supports four modes, which are as follows:
3-62 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l l l l

3 Boards

Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.7.8 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including STM-4 optical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

STM-4 Optical Interface Performance


The performance of the STM-4 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-48 STM-4 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Minimum receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 622080 S-4.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1274 to 1356 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-4.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1280 to 1335 -3 to 2 -28 -8 10 L-4.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -3 to 2 -28 -8 10

NOTE

SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-63

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-49 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL4 Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 290 g < 7.2 W

3.8 SL1/SD1
The SL1 is an SDH single-port STM-1 board. The SD1 is an SDH dual-port STM-1 board. 3.8.1 Version Description The functional version of the SL1/SD1 is SL61. 3.8.2 Functions and Features The SL1 receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 optical signals. The SD1 receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals. 3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the SL1/SD1. 3.8.4 Front Panel There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel. 3.8.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the SL1/SD1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.8.6 Board Feature Code The type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. 3.8.7 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte. 3.8.8 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.8.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SL1/SD1 is SL61.

3.8.2 Functions and Features


The SL1 receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 optical signals. The SD1 receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 optical signals.
3-64 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Optical Interface Specifications


l l

The SL1/SD1 provides Ie-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical interfaces. The optical interface complies with ITU-T G.957.

Optical Module Specifications


l l l l

Adopts the SFP optical modules and provides LC fiber connectors. Supports the setting of turning on or shutting down the laser. Supports the querying of the technical parameters of the optical modules. Supports the reporting of the performance events related to the transmit optical power and receive optical power. Supports the ALS function.
NOTE

The ALS functions as follows: 1. When the optical module detects the R_LOS alarm at the receive port and the alarm persists for 500 ms, the corresponding laser at the transmit port is automatically shut down. 2. The laser starts to launch an alternative laser pulse. The light is emitted for 2s after a 60s interval. 3. When the R_LOS alarm is cleared, the laser returns to the normal working state and emits light continuously.

Overhead Processing
l l l l

Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-1 signals. Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-1 signals. Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-1 signals. Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.
NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode. The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified. The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default, the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing
Processes AU pointers.

Protection Processing
l

Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in a linear MSP group. Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions. Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.
NOTE

l l

For the details of SNCP and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-65

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Alarms and Performance Events


l l

Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Features
l l l l l

Supports inloop and outloop at the optical interface. Supports outloop on the VC-4 path. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.8.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the SL1/SD1.

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-23 Block diagram of the SL1/SD1 working principle
Backplane PXC SCC

STM-1 STM-1

O/E conversion unit

Overhead processing unit

Logic processing unit

SCC Logic control unit Service bus Overhead bus STM-1 signal Control bus

3-66

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-50 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SL1/SD1 Proced ure 1 Functional Module O/E conversion unit Processing Flow
l l l

Regenerates STM-1 optical signals. Detects the R_LOS alarm. Converts the STM-1 optical signals into electrical signals. Restores the clock signal. Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. Performs descrambling. Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the SCC. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. Checks higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal into the logic processing unit. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overhead of an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the 8M signal. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

Overhead processing unit

l l

l l

Logic processing unit

l l

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-67

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-51 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SL1/SD1 Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l

Processes clock. Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Sets higher order path overheads. Sets the AU pointer. Sets multiplex section overheads. Sets regenerator section overheads. Performs scrambling. Converts the electrical signals into optical signals.

Overhead processing unit

l l l l l

O/E conversion unit

Control Signal Processing Flow


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.

3.8.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, STM-1 optical interfaces, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-24 SL1 front panel
TX1
STAT SRV LOS1
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

RX1

Figure 3-25 SD1 front panel


TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2

SL1

SD1

3-68

STAT SRV LOS1 LOS2

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

SD1

SL1

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicators
Table 3-52 SL1/SD1 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The first optical interface of the SL1/SD1 reports the R_LOS alarm. The first optical interface of the SL1/SD1 has no R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SD1 reports the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SD1 has no R_LOS alarm.

LOS1

On (red)

Off

LOS2

On (red)

Off

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-69

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Interfaces
Table 3-53 SL1 interface description Interface TX1 Description Transmit port of an STM-1 optical interface Receive port of an STM-1 optical interface Type of Connector LC (SFP) Cable Fiber jumper

RX1

Table 3-54 SD1 interface description Interface TX1 Description Transmit port of the first STM-1 optical interface Receive port of the first STM-1 optical interface Transmit port of the second STM-1 optical interface Receive port of the second STM-1 optical interface LC (SFP) Type of Connector LC (SFP) Cable Fiber jumper

RX1

TX2

RX2

Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.8.5 Valid Slots


In the IDU 620, the SL1/SD1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-26 Slots of the SL1/SD1 in the IDU 620
SL1/SD1 EXT FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

SL1/SD1 EXT EXT SL1/SD1 SL1/SD1 EXT SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT SL1/SD1 PXC PXC

3-70

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-55 Slot assigning principle of the SL1/SD1 Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.8.6 Board Feature Code


The type of the SFP module equipped on the SL1/SD1 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. Table 3-56 Board feature code of the SL1/SD1 Board Feature Code 01 02 03 04 Type of the Optical Module Ie-1 S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2 Part Number of the Optical Module 34060287 34060276 34060281 34060282

3.8.7 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

J0 Byte
The board supports three modes, which are as follows:
l l l

Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

J1 Byte
The board supports four modes, which are as follows:
l

Single-byte mode
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-71

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3 Boards
l l l

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.8.8 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 optical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

STM-1 Optical Interface Performance


The performance of the STM-1 optical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.957. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-57 STM-1 optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Receiver minimum sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 155520 Ie-1 Multi-mode fiber 2 1270 to 1380 -19 to -14 -30 -14 10 S-1.1 Single-mode fiber 15 1261 to 1360 -15 to -8 -28 -8 8.2 L-1.1 Single-mode fiber 40 1280 to 1335 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10 L-1.2 Single-mode fiber 80 1480 to 1580 -5 to 0 -34 -10 10

NOTE

SDH optical interface boards use SFP modules for providing optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

3-72

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-58 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SL1/SD1 Item Description SL1 Dimensions Weight Power consumption SD1

203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 290 g <3W 300 g < 3.9 W

3.9 SLE/SDE
The SLE is an SDH single-port electrical STM-1 board and the SDE is an SDH dual-port electrical STM-1 board. 3.9.1 Version Description The functional version of the SLE/SDE is SL61. 3.9.2 Functions and Features The SLE receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 electrical signals. The SDE receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 electrical signals. 3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the SLE/SDE. 3.9.4 Front Panel There are indicators and STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel. 3.9.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the SLE/SDE can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.9.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte. 3.9.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 electrical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.9.1 Version Description


The functional version of the SLE/SDE is SL61.

3.9.2 Functions and Features


The SLE receives and transmits 1xSTM-1 electrical signals. The SDE receives and transmits 2xSTM-1 electrical signals.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-73

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Overhead Processing
l l l l

Processes the regenerator section overheads of the STM-1 signals. Processes the multiplex section overheads of the STM-1 signals. Processes the higher order path overheads of the STM-1 signals. Supports the setting and querying of the J0/J1/C2 byte.
NOTE

Higher order path overheads are processed in two modes. The first mode is called the pass-through mode. The path overheads are detected in the receive direction only and the overhead values are not modified. The second mode is called the termination mode. When the path overheads are detected in the receive direction, the transmit direction resets the overheads according to the default value of the board. By default, the board adopts the pass-through mode.

Pointer Processing
Processes AU pointers.

Protection Processing
l

Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in an SNCP group. Supports the monitoring and reporting of the status of the working and protection channels in a linear MSP group. Supports the setting of the SNCP switching conditions. Supports the setting of the linear MSP switching conditions.
NOTE

l l

For the details of SNCP and linear MSP, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Alarms and Performance Events


l l

Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the alarm threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events.
NOTE

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide.

Maintenance Features
l l l l l

Supports inloop and outloop at the electrical interface. Supports outloop on the VC-4 path. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-74

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


NOTE

3 Boards

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.9.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one STM-1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the SLE/SDE.

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-27 Block diagram of the SLE/SDE working principle
Backplane STM-1 PXC

STM-1

Line interface unit

Codec unit

Overhead processing unit

Logic processing unit

SCC

SCC Logic control unit Service bus Overhead bus Control bus STM-1 signal

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-59 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the SLE/SDE Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Line interface unit CODEC unit Processing Flow
l

The external STM-1 electrical signals are coupled by the transformer and then are sent to the board. Equalizes the received signals. Detects the R_LOS alarm. Performs CMI decoding.

l l l

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-75

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Proced ure 3

Functional Module Overhead processing unit

Processing Flow
l l

Restores the clock signal. Synchronizes the frames and detects the R_LOS and R_LOF alarms. Performs descrambling. Checks the B1 and B2 bytes and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Checks bit 6 to bit 8 of the K2 byte and the M1 byte and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Detects the changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and reports it to the SCC. Extracts the orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes including the F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes and K bytes to form a 2M overhead signal and sends it to the logic processing unit. Adjusts the AU pointer and generates the corresponding performance events. Checks higher order path overheads and generates the corresponding alarms and performance events. Transmits the pointer indication signal and VC-4 signal into the logic processing unit. Processes the clock signal. Multiplexes the 2M overhead signals to be an 8M overhead signal and sends it to the SCC. Each overhead of an STM-1 interface occupies a 2M timeslot in the 8M signal. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

l l

Logic processing unit

l l

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-60 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the SLE/SDE Proced ure 1 Functional Module Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l

Processes clock. Demultiplexes 2M overhead signals from the 8M overhead signal. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC.

3-76

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Proced ure 2

Functional Module Overhead processing unit

Processing Flow
l l l l l

Sets higher order path overheads. Sets the AU pointer. Sets multiplex section overheads. Sets regenerator section overheads. Performs scrambling. Performs CMI coding. The STM-1 electrical signals are coupled by the transformer and then are sent to the external cable.

3 4

Codec unit Line interface unit

l l

Control Signal Processing Flow


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.

3.9.4 Front Panel


There are indicators and STM-1 electrical interfaces on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-28 SLE front panel
SLE
STAT SRV

R1

T1

Figure 3-29 SDE front panel


SDE
STAT SRV

R1

T1

R2

T2

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SDE

SLE

3-77

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicators
Table 3-61 SLE/SDE indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

Interfaces
Table 3-62 SLE interface description Interface T Description Transmit port of an STM-1 electrical interface Receive port of an STM-1 electrical interface Type of Connector SMB Cable STM-1e cable

Table 3-63 SDE interface description Interface T1 Description Transmit port of the first STM-1 electrical interface Type of Connector SMB Cable STM-1e cable

3-78

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interface R1

Description Receive port of the first STM-1 electrical interface Transmit port of the second STM-1 electrical interface Receive port of the second STM-1 electrical interface

Type of Connector

Cable

T2

SMB

R2

3.9.5 Valid Slots


In the IDU 620, the SLE/SDE can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-30 Slots of the SLE/SDE in the IDU 620
SLE/SDE EXT FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

SLE/SDE EXT EXT SLE/SDE EXT SLE/SDE SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT SLE/SDE PXC PXC

Table 3-64 Slot assigning principle of the SLE/SDE Item Slot assignment priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.9.6 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are the J0 byte and J1 byte.

J0 Byte
The board supports three modes, which are as follows:
l l l

Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J0 byte, that is, the J0 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J0 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-79

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

". The

J1 Byte
The board supports four modes, which are as follows:
l l l l

Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.9.7 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including STM-1 electrical interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

STM-1 Electrical Interface Performance


The performance of the STM-1 electrical interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-65 STM-1 electrical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance 155520 CMI One coaxial wire pair 75

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-66 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SLE/SDE Item Description SLE Dimensions Weight Power consumption
3-80

SDE

203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 300 g < 4.2 W 330 g < 4.9 W
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.10 PL3
The PL3 is a 3xE3/T3 tributary board. 3.10.1 Version Description The functional version of the PL3 is SL61. 3.10.2 Functions and Features The PL3 receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 signals. 3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one E3/T3 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the PL3. 3.10.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E3 ports on the front panel. 3.10.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the PL3 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.10.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J1 byte. 3.10.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including E3 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.10.1 Version Description


The functional version of the PL3 is SL61.

3.10.2 Functions and Features


The PL3 receives and transmits 3xE3/T3 signals.

Service Signal Processing


l

Supports the setting and querying of the type of the accessed service signal by the software (E3 or T3). Supports the setting and querying of the input/output equalization of the T3 service signal.

Overhead and Pointer Processing


l l l

Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3 level. Supports the querying of the J1 and C2 bytes. Supports the setting of the J1 and C2 bytes.

Clock Function
Supports the first and third E3/T3 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-81

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Maintenance Features
l l l l

Supports inloop and outloop at the E3/T3 tributary. Supports the PRBS 15 test. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.10.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one E3/T3 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the PL3.

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-31 Block diagram of the PL3 working principle
Backplane E1/T3

E1/T3

Line interface unit

Codec unit

Mapping/ Demapping unit

Logic processing unit

PXC

SCC Logic control unit Service bus Control bus E1 signal

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-67 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PL3 Proced ure 1 Functional Module Line interface unit Processing Flow
l

The external E3/T3 signal is coupled by the transformer and then is sent to the board.

3-82

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Proced ure 2

Functional Module Codec unit

Processing Flow
l l l l

Equalizes the received signal. Restores the clock signal. Detects the T_ALOS alarm. Performs HDB3 decoding (in the case of E3 signals) or B3ZS decoding (in the case of T3 signals). Asynchronously maps the signal into C-3. Processes path overheads and forms the signal to be VC-3. Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-3. One TU-3 is multiplexed into one TUG-3. Three TU-3s are performed with byte interleaving and are multiplexed into one C-4. C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and the VC-4 is formed. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

Mapping/ Demapping unit

l l

l l l

Logic processing unit

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-68 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PL3 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Logic processing unit Mapping/ Demapping unit Processing Flow
l

Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. Demultiplexes one TU-3 from one TUG-3. Processes the TU pointer and demultiplexes one VC-3 from one TU-3. Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the corresponding alarms and performance events. Extracts E3/T3 signals. Performs HDB3 coding (in the case of E3 signals) or B3ZS coding (in the case of T3 signals). The E3/T3 signal is coupled by the transformer and then is sent to the external cable.

l l l

3 4

Codec unit Line interface unit

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-83

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Control Signal Processing Flow


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.

3.10.4 Front Panel


There are indicators and E3 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-32 PL3 front panel
PL3
STAT SRV

R1

T1

R2

T2

R3

T3

Indicators
Table 3-69 PL3 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

3-84

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

PL3

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interfaces
Table 3-70 PL3 interface description Interface T1 Description Transmit port of the first E3/T3 electrical interface Receive port of the first E3/T3 electrical interface Transmit port of the second E3/T3 electrical interface Receive port of the second E3/T3 electrical interface Transmit port of the third E3/T3 electrical interface Receive port of the third E3/T3 electrical interface SMB SMB Type of Connector SMB Cable E3/T3 cable

R1

T2

R2

T3

R3

3.10.5 Valid Slots


In the IDU 620, the PL3 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-33 Slots of the PL3 in the IDU 620
EXT PL3 FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT PL3 EXT PL3 EXT PL3 SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT PL3 PXC PXC

Table 3-71 Slot assigning principle of the PL3 Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 description slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-85

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3.10.6 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J1 byte.

J1 Byte
The board supports four modes, which are as follows:
l l l l

Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3.10.7 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including E3 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

E3/T3 Interface Performance


The performance of the E3/T3 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-72 E3/T3 interface performance Item Performance E3 Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) 34368 HDB3 One coaxial wire pair 75 T3 44736 B3ZS

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-73 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PL3 Item Dimensions Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-86

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Item Weight Power consumption

Description 310 g < 5.1 W

3.11 PO1/PH1/PD1
The PO1 is an 8xE1 tributary board. The PH1 is a 16xE1 tributary board.The PD1 is a 32xE1 tributary board. 3.11.1 Version Description The PO1 has two functional versions: SL61PO1 and SL62PO1. The functional version of the PH1/PD1 is SL61. 3.11.2 Functions and Features The PO1 receives and transmits 8xE1 signals. The PH1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals.The PD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals. 3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1. 3.11.4 Front Panel There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel. 3.11.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the PO1/PH1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.11.6 Board Feature Code The interface impedance of a PO1/PH1/PD1 can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. The board feature code is the number after the board name of the bar code. 3.11.7 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J2 byte. 3.11.8 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.11.1 Version Description


The PO1 has two functional versions: SL61PO1 and SL62PO1. The functional version of the PH1/PD1 is SL61. Table 3-74 Differences between SL61PO1 and SL62PO1 Item Connector type of E1 interface E1 interface impedance SL61PO1 DB44 75 ohm or 120 ohm SL62PO1 RJ-45 120 ohm

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-87

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3.11.2 Functions and Features


The PO1 receives and transmits 8xE1 signals. The PH1 receives and transmits 16xE1 signals.The PD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.

Overhead and Pointer Processing


l l l

Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-12 level. Supports the querying of the J2 and V5 bytes. Supports the setting of the J2 and V5 byte.

Clock Functions
l l

Supports the retiming function of E1 signals. Supports the first and fifth E1 signals to be extracted as the tributary clock source.

Maintenance Features
l l l l

Supports inloop and outloop at the E1 tributary. Supports the PRBS 15 test. Supports warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.11.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one E1 signal as an example to describe the working principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1.

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-34 Block diagram of the PO1/PH1/PD1 working principle
Backplane E1

E1

Line interface unit

Codec unit

Mapping/ Demapping unit

Logic processing unit

PXC

SCC Logic control unit Service bus Control bus E1 signal

3-88

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-75 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Line interface unit Codec unit Processing Flow
l

The external E1 signal is coupled by the transformer and then is sent to the board. Equalizes the received signal. Restores the clock signal. Detects the T_ALOS alarm. Performs HDB3 decoding. Asynchronously maps the signal into C-12. Processes path overheads and forms the signal to be VC-12. Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-12. Three TU-12s are performed with byte interleaving and are multiplexed into one TUG-2. Seven TUG-2s are performed with byte interleaving and are multiplexed into one TUG-3. Three TUG-3s are performed with byte interleaving and are multiplexed into one C-4. C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and the VC-4 is formed. Processes the clock signal. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

l l l l

Mapping/ Demapping unit

l l

l l

Logic processing unit

l l

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-76 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the PO1/PH1/PD1 Proced ure 1 Functional module Logic processing unit Processing Flow
l l

Processes the clock signal. Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-89

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Proced ure 2

Functional module Mapping/ Demapping unit

Processing Flow
l l l l

Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4. Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3. Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2. Processes path overheads and pointers and detects the corresponding alarms and performance events. Extracts E1 signals. Performs HDB3 coding. The E1 signal is coupled by the transformer and then is sent to the external cable.

3 4

Codec unit Line interface unit

l l

Control Signal Processing


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC.

3.11.4 Front Panel


There are indicators and E1 ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-35 PO1 front panel
SL61PO1
1~8

PO1

SL62PO1
PO1
STAT SRV

STAT SRV

Figure 3-36 PH1 front panel


1~8 9~16

PH1

3-90

STAT SRV

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

PH1

PO1

PO1

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-37 PD1 front panel


PD1
STAT SRV

Indicators
Table 3-77 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

Interfaces
Table 3-78 SL61PO1 interface description Interface 1-8 Description 1 to 8 E1 interfaces Type of Connector DB44 Cable E1 cable to the external equipment or E1 cable to the E1 Panel

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

PD1

1-16

17-32

3-91

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 3-79 SL62PO1 interface description Interface 1/2/3/4/5/6/7/8 Description 1 to 8 E1 interfaces Type of Connector RJ-45 Cable The cables need to be made on site by terminating network cables with RJ-45 connectors

Table 3-80 PH1 interface description Interface 1-8 9-16 Description 1 to 8 E1 interfaces 9 to 16 E1 interfaces Type of Connector DB44 DB44 Cable E1 cable to the external equipment or E1 cable to the E1 Panel

Table 3-81 PD1 interface description Interface 1-16 17-32 Description 1 to 16 E1 interfaces 17 to 32 E1 interfaces Type of Connector MDR68 MDR68 Cable E1 transit cable

For the pin assignments of the DB44 interface of the SL61PO1/PH1 board, see Figure 3-38 and refer toTable 3-82. For the pin assignment of the RJ-45 interface of the SL62PO1 board, see Figure 3-39, and refer to Table 3-83. For the pin assignments of the MDR68 interface of the PD1 board, see Figure 3-40 and refer to Table 3-85. Figure 3-38 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1)
Pos. 1

Pos. 44

3-92

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-82 Pin assignments of the DB44 interface (PO1/PH1) Pin 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Others Signal 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) Reserved Pin 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Signal 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+) 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (-) -

Figure 3-39 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1)

87654321

Table 3-83 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1) Interface n (n: 1-8) Pin 1 2
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Signal The nth E1 transmitting differential signal (+) The nth E1 transmitting differential signal (-)
3-93

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Interface

Pin 4 5 3, 6, 7, 8

Signal The nth E1 receiving differential signal (+) The nth E1 receiving differential signal (-) Reserved

The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-84. Table 3-84 Indicator description of the RJ-45 interface (SL62PO1) Indicator Yellow indicator Status On Off Green indicator Meaning The E1 signal is lost. The E1 signal is normal. Reserved.

Figure 3-40 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1)

Pos. 1

Pos. 68

Table 3-85 Pin assignments of the MDR68 interface (PD1) Pin 36 35 42 41 46 45 50 49


3-94

Signal 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (-)

Pin 38 37 40 39 44 43 48 47

Signal 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+) 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (-)
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 22 21 26 25 30 29 34 33 55 56 59 60 63 64 67 68 Others

Signal 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 9th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 9th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 10th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 10th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 11th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 11th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 12th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 12th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 13th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 13th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 14th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 14th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 15th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 15th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 16th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 16th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) Reserved

Pin 1 2 5 6 9 10 13 14 20 19 24 23 28 27 32 31 53 54 57 58 61 62 65 66 -

Signal 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 9th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 9th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 10th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 10th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 11th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 11th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 12th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 12th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 13th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 13th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 14th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 14th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 15th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 15th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 16th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 16th E1 receiving differential signal (-) -

3.11.5 Valid Slots


In the IDU 620, the PO1/PH1 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-95

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Figure 3-41 Slots of the PO1/PH1/PD1 in the IDU 620


EXT PO1/PH1/PD1 FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT PO1/PH1/PD1 PO1/PH1/PD1 EXT EXT PO1/PH1/PD1 SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

PO1/PH1/PD1 EXT PXC PXC

Table 3-86 Slot assigning principle of the PO1/PH1/PD1 Item Slot assignment priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.11.6 Board Feature Code


The interface impedance of a PO1/PH1/PD1 can be identified by the board feature code of the bar code. The board feature code is the number after the board name of the bar code. Table 3-87 Board feature code of the PO1/PH1/PD1 Board Feature Code A B Interface Impedance (ohm) 75 120

3.11.7 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameter that you may frequently set is the J2 byte.

J2 Byte
The board supports two modes, which are as follows:
l l

Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

3-96

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.11.8 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including E1 port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

E1 Interface Performance
The performance of the E1 interface is compliant with ITU-T G.703. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-88 E1 interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Code pattern Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance 2048 HDB3 One coaxial wire pair 75 One symmetrical wire pair 120

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-89 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PO1/PH1 Item Description PO1 Dimensions Weight Power consumption PH1 PD1

203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 280 g <2W 310 g < 2.8 W 380 g < 5.8 W

3.12 EFT4
The EFT4 is a 4-port 10M/100M Ethernet transparent transmission board. 3.12.1 Version Description The EFT4 has two functional versions: SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B. 3.12.2 Functions and Features The EFT4 transparently transmits 4xFE signals. 3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EFT4. 3.12.4 Front Panel
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-97

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

There are indicators and FE ports on the front panel. 3.12.5 Valid Slots The IDU 620 can be configured with up to four EFT4s, and the EFT4 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. 3.12.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters. 3.12.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.12.1 Version Description


The EFT4 has two functional versions: SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B. Table 3-90 Differences between SL61EFT4VER.A and SL61EFT4VER.B Function LPT SL61EFT4VER.A Not supported SL61EFT4VER.B Supported

3.12.2 Functions and Features


The EFT4 transparently transmits 4xFE signals.

Ethernet Service Signal Processing


l

Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working modes supported are 100M full-duplex, 10M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation. Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes. Supports JUMBO frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes. Supports the IEEE 802.3x flow control based on Ethernet port. Supports the point-to-point link state pass through (LPT) function (only the SL61EFT4VER.B provides this function).
NOTE

l l l

For the details of the features of Ethernet ports and LPT, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signals


l

Supports the following encapsulation formats: high level data link control (HDLC), link access procedure-SDH (LAPS), and generic framing procedure (GFP). Supports an uplink bandwidth of 2xVC-4s. Supports the virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv (X = 1-63) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1-6).
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

l l

3-98

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l

3 Boards

Supports the link capacity adjustment scheme (LCAS).


NOTE

For the details of encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Overhead Processing
l l l

Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3/VC-12 level. Supports the querying of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes. Supports the setting of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

Alarms and Performance Events


l l

Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the BER threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events. Supports events and alarms.
NOTE

l l

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. For the details of RMON performance, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Maintenance Features
l l l l l l

Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports. Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports. Supports inloop and outloop on the VC-3 path. Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. When a warm reset is performed, the corresponding board software in the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.12.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EFT4.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-99

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-42 Block diagram of the EFT4 working principle
Backplane FE Interface module PXC

FE

Service processing module

Encapsulation module

Mapping module

Logic processing unit

PXC

SCC Control and communication module Service bus Control bus FE

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-91 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFT4 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Interface processing module Service processing module Encapsulation module Mapping module Logic processing unit Processing Flow Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the accessed FE signal. Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code processing, and Ethernet performance counting for the frame signal. Performs the HDLC, LAPS, or GFP encapsulation for the Ethernet frames. Performs mapping at the VC-12/VC-3 level for the data frames after encapsulation. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

3 4 5

3-100

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-92 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFT4 Proced ure 1 2 3 4 5 Functional Module Logic processing unit Mapping module Encapsulation module Service processing module Interface processing module Processing Flow Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Demaps the signal at the VC-12/VC-3 level. Decapsulates the signal after the demapping. Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance counting. Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding and sends the generated FE signal to the Ethernet port.

Control Signal Processing Flow


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.

3.12.4 Front Panel


There are indicators and FE ports on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-43 EFT4 front panel
EFT4
STAT SRV

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

EFT4

3-101

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicators
Table 3-93 EFT4 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

Interfaces
Table 3-94 EFT4 interface description Interface FE1-FE4 Description Fast Ethernet service interface Type of Connector RJ-45 Cable Network cable

For the front view and pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces, see Figure 3-44 and refer to Table 3-95. Figure 3-44 RJ-45 front view

87654321

3-102

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-95 Pin assignments of FE1-FE4 interfaces Interface FE1-FE4 Pin 1 2 3 6 4, 5, 7, 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Reserved

FE1-FE4 interfaces each have two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-96. Table 3-96 Ethernet port indicator description Indicator LINK (green) Status On Off ACT (yellow) On or flashing Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

3.12.5 Valid Slots


The IDU 620 can be configured with up to four EFT4s, and the EFT4 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8. Figure 3-45 Slots of the EFT4 in the IDU 620
EXT EFT4 FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT EFT4 EXT EFT4 EXT EFT4 SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT EFT4 PXC PXC

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-103

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 3-97 Slot assigning principle of the EFT4 Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.12.6 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

SDH Parameters
The J1 and J2 bytes are the SDH parameters that you may frequently set.
l

J1 byte The board supports four modes, which are as follows:


Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC 16-byte mode without CRC 64-byte mode

By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ".
l

J2 byte The board supports two modes, which are as follows:


Single-byte mode 16-byte mode with CRC

By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The latter five characters of the string are blank spaces.

Ethernet External Port Parameters


The EFT4 provides four external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT4. The parameters that you may frequently set for every external port are as follows: port enabled, working mode, maximum frame length, and flow control.
l

Port enabled This parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default, this parameter is set to disabled.

Working mode The board supports three working modes as follows:

3-104

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


3 Boards

Auto-negotiation 10M full-duplex 100M full-duplex

By default, the working mode is auto-negotiation. When the equipment on the opposite side adopts the auto-negotiation, 10M full-duplex, or 100M full-duplex mode, the local equipment should be set to the same working mode. When the equipment on the opposite side adopts 10M half-duplex or 100M half-duplex, the local equipment should be set to the auto-negotiation mode.
l

Maximum frame length The board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 1535 bytes. By default, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smaller than the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on the opposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement.

Flow control The board supports three flow control modes as follows:

Disabled mode Autonegotiation flow control mode Non-autonegotiation flow control mode

By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode. The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

Enable dissymmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.

Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames.

Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control The port has the following abilities:

Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and processing the received PAUSE frames Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and not processing the received PAUSE frames Processing the received PAUSE frames and not transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion

The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

Send only The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.

Receive only The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames during congestion.

Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-105

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

The flow control parameter should be set depending on that of the equipment on the opposite side.

Ethernet Internal Port Parameters


The EFT4 provides four internal ports, that is, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK4, corresponding to PORT1 to PORT4 respectively. The parameters that you may frequently set for every internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol, bound path, and LCAS.
l

Encapsulation/Mapping protocol The board supports three encapsulation/mapping protocols: GFP, HDLC, and LAPS. GFP is the default protocol. The protocol and related parameter settings should be the same as the protocol and related parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

Bound path All the VC-3s in VC-4-1 and VC-4-2 can be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximum number of bound paths is 6. All the VC-12s in VC-4-2 can also be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximum number of bound paths is 63.

LCAS The board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCAS function is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS function should be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

3.12.7 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

FE electrical Interface Performance


FE interfaces are 10/100BASE-T(X) interfaces and comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-98 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ-45

3-106

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-99 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFT4 Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 306 g 7.5 W

3.13 EMS6
The EMS6 is a 4-Port RJ-45 + 2-Port SFP Fast Ethernet / Gigabit Ethernet Switching Processing Board. 3.13.1 Version Description The EMS6 has two functional versions: SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B. 3.13.2 Functions and Features The EMS6 accesses 4xFE signals and 2xGE/FE signals, and supports transparent transmission services and Layer 2 switching services. 3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one FE/GE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EMS6. 3.13.4 Front Panel There are indicators, four FE ports, two SFP GE ports, and a label on the front panel. 3.13.5 Valid Slots The EMS6 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. 3.13.6 Board Feature Code The type of the SFP module equipped on the EMS6 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. 3.13.7 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters. 3.13.8 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.13.1 Version Description


The EMS6 has two functional versions: SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-107

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 3-100 Differences between SL61EMS6VER.A and SL61EMS6VER.B Function LPT SL61EMS6VER.A Not supported SL61EMS6VER.B Supported

3.13.2 Functions and Features


The EMS6 accesses 4xFE signals and 2xGE/FE signals, and supports transparent transmission services and Layer 2 switching services.

Ethernet Service Signal Processing


l

Provides GE optical interfaces or GE electrical interfaces by using two SFP modules. The GE electrical interface is compatible with the FE electrical interface. Supports the setting and querying of the working modes of the Ethernet ports. The working modes supported are as follows:

The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes. The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes. The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation working modes.

Supports the setting and querying of the network attributes of the Ethernet ports. The following three network attributes are available: UNI, C-aware, and S-aware. Sets and queries TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. The TAG attribute of an Ethernet interface functions only when the network attribute of the Ethernet interface is set to UNI. Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes. Supports JUMBO frames with a maximum frame length of 9600 bytes. External ports PORT1-PORT6 and internal ports VCTRUNK5-VCTRUNK8 support JUMBO frames. Internal ports VCTRUNK1-VCTRUNK4 do not support JUMBO frames.

Supports the port-based flow control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x (only for transparently transmitted Ethernet services). Supports the point-to-point LPT function and the point-to-multipoint LPT function (only the SL61EMS6VER.B provides this function). Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function. Supports Ethernet ring protection switching (ERPS).
NOTE

l l

For the details of the features of Ethernet ports, LPT, LAG, and ERPS, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Services


l

Supports the EPL services that are based on PORT.


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-108

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l l l l l

3 Boards

Supports the EVPL services that are based on PORT+VLAN. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. Supports the broadcast packet suppression function, spanning tree protocol (STP), and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The function and protocols comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports the IGMP snooping.
NOTE

For the details of Layer 2 switching processing of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

QinQ Service Processing


l l l l

Supports the VLAN stack nesting technology that complies with IEEE 802.1ad. Adds, strips, and converts the S-VLAN tag. Supports the EVPL services that are based on QinQ. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on QinQ (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).
NOTE

For the details of the QinQ service, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Ethernet Service QoS Processing


l

Supports the following traffic classifications:


Port-based traffic classification Port+CVLAN-based traffic classification Port+SVLAN-based traffic classification Port+CVLAN+SVLAN-based traffic classification

l l

Supports traffic-based CAR. Supports four CoS types, namely, Simple, VLAN PRI, DSCP, and IP TOS, and allocates packets to different egress queues. Supports PORT-based or PORT queue-based traffic shaping. An Ethernet interface supports eight egress queues, and supports the SP, WRR, or SP+WRR queue scheduling mode.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the Ethernet QoS, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Ethernet OAM Processing


l

Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:


Management of OAM maintenance points Continuity check test Loopback test


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-109

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3 Boards
l

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Link trace test Ping test Performance test OAM automatic discovery Link performance monitoring Fault detection Remote loopback initiating Selfloop detection and selfloop port blocking

Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:


NOTE

For the details of the Ethernet OAM, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Traffic Statistics
l

Supports traffic monitoring over Ethernet interfaces. The received traffic threshold can be set for Ethernet interfaces and an alarm is reported when the received traffic exceeds the threshold. Supports traffic statistics over Ethernet interfaces. The period of traffic statistics is 15 minutes and the statistic data can be stored for 30 days.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signals


l l l

Supports the following encapsulation formats: HDLC, LAPS, and GFP. Supports an uplink bandwidth of 2xVC-4s. Supports the virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv (X = 1-63) or VC-3-Xv (X = 1-6). Supports the LCAS.
NOTE

For the details of encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Overhead Processing
l l l

Processes overheads and pointers at the VC-3/VC-12 level. Supports the querying of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes. Supports the setting of the J1, J2, C2, and V5 bytes.

Alarms and Performance Events


l l

Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the BER threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events. Supports RMON performance events and alarms.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-110

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


NOTE

3 Boards

l l

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. For the details of RMON performance, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Maintenance Features
l l l l l l l l

Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports. Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports. Supports inloop and outloop on the VC-3 path. Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames and Ethernet test frames. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the SFP module.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. Generally, when a warm reset is performed, the board software is reset but the services are not affected. When LAG protection is configured, however, a warm reset may result in packet loss. When a cold reset is performed, not only the board software is reset, but also the board is initialized. When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.13.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one FE/GE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EMS6.

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-46 Block diagram of the EMS6 working principle
Backplane FE/GE Interface module FE/GE PXC

Service processing module

Encapsulation module

Mapping module

Logic processing unit

PXC

Control and communication module Service bus Control bus

Mail box

SCC

FE/GE

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-111

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-101 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EMS6 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Interface processing module Service processing module Processing Flow Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the accessed FE/GE signal. Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code processing, and Ethernet performance counting for the frame signal. Classifies the traffic according to the service format and configuration requirements (for example, Ethernet packet, VLAN packet, and other packet format). Processes tags according to the service type. Forwards data frames according to the service type. 3 4 Encapsulation module Mapping module Performs the HDLC, LAPS, or GFP encapsulation for the Ethernet frames. Performs mapping at the VC-12, VC-3, or at a corresponding virtual concatenation level for the data frames after encapsulation. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

Logic processing unit

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-102 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EMS6 Proced ure 1 2 3 4 Functional Module Logic processing unit Mapping module Encapsulation module Service processing module Processing Flow Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Demaps the signal at the VC-12, VC-3, or at a corresponding virtual concatenation level. Decapsulates the signal after the demapping. Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance counting. Forwards data frames according to the service type. Processes tags according to the service type.

3-112

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Proced ure 5

Functional Module Interface processing module

Processing Flow Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for the Ethernet frame signal, and sends the generated FE/GE signal to the Ethernet port.

Control Signal Processing Flow


The communication and control module of the EMS6 consists of the CPU and its peripheral circuits. The EMS6 communicates with the SCC through the mailbox. The configuration data and querying commands from the SCC are issued to the various units of the EMS6 through the communication and control module. The command response reported by the units inside the EMS6, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the SCC through the communication and control module.

3.13.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, four FE ports, two SFP GE ports, and a label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-47 EMS6 front panel
EMS6
STAT PROG SRV LINK1 ACTIV1 LINK2 ACTIV2

CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

GE1

GE2

Indicators
Table 3-103 EMS6 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software.
3-113

PROG

100 ms on (green), and 100 ms off

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

EMS6

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

Status 300 ms on (green), and 300 ms off

Meaning When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost.

On (green) 100 ms on (red), and 100 ms off

On (red)

Off SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off Green indicator (LINK1) On Off Yellow indicator (ACTIV1) On or flashing Off

The software is running normally. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The link at the GE1 port is normal. The link at the GE1 port fails. The GE1 port is transmitting or receiving data. The GE1 port is not transmitting or receiving data. The link at the GE2 port is normal. The link at the GE2 port fails. The GE2 port is transmitting or receiving data.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Green indicator (LINK2)

On Off

Yellow indicator (ACTIV2)

On or flashing

3-114

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Indicator

Status Off

Meaning The GE2 port is not transmitting or receiving data.

Interfaces
Table 3-104 EMS6 interface description Interfac e FE1-FE4 GE1GE2 Description Fast Ethernet service interface Gigabit Ethernet service interface Type of Connector RJ-45 Replaceable SFP module
l

Cable Network cable.


l

Optical module: Uses the LC connector, and supports 1000BASE-SX and 1000BASE-LX. Electrical module: Uses the RJ-45 connector and supports 10/100/1000BASE-T(X).

When the optical module is used, use the fiber jumper. When the electrical module is used, use the network cable.

The FE port and GE electrical port of the EMS6 support the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing mode. For the front view and pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-48 and refer to Table 3-105 and Table 3-106. Figure 3-48 RJ-45 front view

87654321

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-115

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 3-105 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Table 3-106 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ Function Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+)

3-116

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Pin

10/100BASE-T(X) Signal Function -

1000BASE-T Signal BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire C (-)

Reserved

The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-107. Table 3-107 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description Indicator Green indicator (LINK) Status On Off Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

Label
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EMS6. The laser safety class label indicates that the laser safety class of the optical interface is CLASS 1. This means that the maximum launched optical power of the optical interface of the EMS6 is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).

3.13.5 Valid Slots


The EMS6 can be installed in slots 4, 5, 6, 7, and 8 of the IDU 620. Figure 3-49 Slots of the EMS6 in the IDU 620
EMS6 EXT FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EMS6 EXT EXT EMS6 EXT EMS6 SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT EMS6 PXC PXC

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-117

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 3-108 Slot assigning principle of the EMS6 Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 4 > Slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.13.6 Board Feature Code


The type of the SFP module equipped on the EMS6 can be identified by the board feature code that is in the bar code. The board feature code follows the board name that is in the bar code. Table 3-109 Board feature code of the EMS6 Board Feature Code 01 02 03 Module Type 1000BASE-SX (0.55 km) 1000BASE-LX (10 km) 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) BOM Code of the Module 34060286 34060219 34100052

3.13.7 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are as follows: SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

SDH Parameters
The J1 and J2 bytes are the SDH parameters that you may frequently set.
l

J1 byte The board supports the following four modes: single-byte mode, 16-byte mode with CRC, 16-byte mode without CRC, and 64-byte mode. By default, the board does not monitor the received J1 byte, that is, the J1 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J1 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS " (five blank spaces after the character string).

J2 byte The board supports the following two modes: single-byte mode and 16-byte mode with CRC. By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received is set to the disable mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the following 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS " (five blank spaces after the character string).

Ethernet External Port Parameters


The EMS6 provides six external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT6. The parameters that you may frequently set for every external port are as follows:
3-118 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l l l l l

3 Boards

Basic attributes TAG attributes Network attributes Flow control Advanced attributes

The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following three parameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length.
l

Port enabled This parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default, this parameter is set to disabled.

Working mode

The FE interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes. The GE electrical interface supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M fullduplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-negotiation working modes. The GE optical interface supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-negotiation working modes.

Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working mode of the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.
l

Maximum frame length The board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 9600 bytes. By default, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smaller than the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on the opposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement.

The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. The TAG attributes include the following parameters:
l

TAG The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be set to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that do not contain a TAG. Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that contain a TAG. Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do not contain a TAG. In the case of the packets that do not contain a TAG, the port adds a TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of the packets that contain a TAG, the port receives the packets without change.

Ingress check This parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparently transmits the received packet.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-119

3 Boards
l

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Default VLAN ID When the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for the port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1.

The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows:
l

UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes. C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag. S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

The board supports the following flow control modes:autonegotiation flow control mode and non-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of the equipment on the opposite side.
l

The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

Disabled The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode. Enable dissymmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.

Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames.

Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control The port adopts the symmetric flow control mode or dissymmetric flow control mode according to the auto-negotiation result.

The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

Disabled The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode. Send only The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.

Receive only The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames during congestion.

Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames.

The advanced attributes are used to set the broadcast packet suppression function. The broadcast packet suppression function prevents broadcast packets from affecting normal data services and also effectively prevents network attacks. The following parameters need to be set for the
3-120 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

broadcast packet suppression function: Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold.
l

The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Disabled, the port does not use the broadcast packet suppression function. When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Enabled, the port discards the received broadcast packets when the traffic of the received broadcast packets exceeds the set broadcast packet suppression threshold.

The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter can be set to a value in the range from 1 to 10. When this parameter is set to N, the port discards the received broadcast packets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceeds Nx10%.

Ethernet Internal Port Parameters


The EMS6 provides eight internal ports, that is, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK8. The parameters that you may frequently set for every internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol, bound path, and LCAS.
l

The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. The TAG attributes include the following parameters:

TAG The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be set to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that do not contain a TAG. Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that contain a TAG. Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do not contain a TAG. In the case of packets that do not contain a TAG, the port adds a TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of packets that contain a TAG, the port simply receives the packets without any change.

Ingress check This parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparently transmits the received packet.

Default VLAN ID When the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for the port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 4095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1.

Encapsulation/Mapping protocol The board supports three encapsulation/mapping protocols: GFP, HDLC, and LAPS. GFP is the default protocol. The protocol and related parameter settings should be the same as the protocol and related parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-121

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

default, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes. C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag. S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

Bound path All the VC-3s in VC-4-1 and VC-4-2 can be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximum number of bound paths is 6. All the VC-12s in VC-4-2 can also be bound to the VCTRUNK. The maximum number of bound paths is 63.

LCAS The board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCAS function is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS function should be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

3.13.8 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including GE port performance, FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

GE Optical Interface Performance


The performance of the GE optical interface is compliant with IEEE 802.3. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-110 GE optical interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Classification code Fiber type Transmission distance (km) Operating wavelength (nm) Mean launched power (dBm) Minimum receiver sensitivity (dBm) Minimum overload (dBm) Minimum extinction ratio (dB) Performance 1000 1000Base-SX Multi-mode fiber 0.5 770 to 860 -9.5 to 0 -17 0 9 1000Base-LX Single-mode fiber 10 1270 to 1355 -9 to -3 -19 -3 9

3-122

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


NOTE

3 Boards

Ethernet service processing boards use SFP modules for providing GE optical interfaces. You can use different types of SFP modules to provide GE optical interfaces with different classification codes and transmission distances.

GE Electrical Interface Performance


The GE electrical interface is 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface and compliant with IEEE 802.3. The GE electrical interface is compatible with FE electrical interfaces. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-111 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) 1000 (1000BASE-T) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) 4D-PAM5 encoding signal (1000BASE-T) Interface type RJ-45

NOTE

Ethernet service processing boards use SFP modules to provide 10/100/1000BASE-T(X) interfaces.

FE electrical Interface Performance


FE interfaces are 10/100BASE-T(X) interfaces and comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table provides the primary performance. Table 3-112 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ-45

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-123

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-113 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EMS6 Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 400 g < 12.3 W

3.14 EFP6
The EFP6 is a 6-port Fast Ethernet EoPDH processing board. 3.14.1 Version Description The functional version of the EFP6 is SL61. 3.14.2 Functions and Features The EFP6 access 6xFE signals, transmits the FE services in EoPDH mode, and supports transparently transmitted services and Layer 2 switching services. 3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow This section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EFP6. 3.14.4 Front Panel There are indicators and six FE interfaces on the front panel. 3.14.5 Valid Slots The EFP6 can be installed in slots 4-8 of the IDU 620. 3.14.6 NM Configuration Reference On the NMS, the board parameters that you may frequently set are SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters. 3.14.7 Technical Specifications This section describes board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.14.1 Version Description


The functional version of the EFP6 is SL61.

3.14.2 Functions and Features


The EFP6 access 6xFE signals, transmits the FE services in EoPDH mode, and supports transparently transmitted services and Layer 2 switching services.

3-124

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Ethernet Service Signal Processing


l

Sets and queries working modes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports five working modes of Ethernet interfaces, namely, 10M full duplex, 10M half duplex, 100M full duplex, 100M half duplex, and auto-negotiation. Sets and queries network attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three network attributes of Ethernet interfaces, UNI, C-Aware, and S-Aware. Sets and queries TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, and supports three TAG attributes of Ethernet interfaces, namely, Tag Aware, Access, and Hybrid. The TAG attribute of an Ethernet interface functions only when the network attribute of the Ethernet interface is set to UNI. Accesses Ethernet II and IEEE 802.3 service frames with the maximum frame length ranging from 1518 to 2000 bytes. Supports JUMBO frames with the maximum frame length of 2000 bytes. Supports IEEE 802.3x flow control based on Ethernet interfaces (only for transparently transmitted Ethernet services). Supports the point-to-point and point-to-multipoint link state pass through (LPT) functions. Supports the link aggregation group (LAG) function.
NOTE

l l

l l

For details on features of Ethernet interfaces, LPT, and LAG, see theOptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Layer 2 Switching Processing of Ethernet Services


l l l l l l

Supports the EPL services that are based on PORT. Supports the EVPL services that are based on PORT+VLAN. Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d bridge. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q bridge. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1ad bridge. Supports the broadcast packet suppression function, spanning tree protocol (STP), and rapid spanning tree protocol (RSTP). The function and protocols comply with IEEE 802.1w. Supports the IGMP snooping.
NOTE

For the details of Layer 2 switching processing of Ethernet services, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

QinQ Service Processing


l l l l

Supports the VLAN stack nesting technology that complies with IEEE 802.1ad. Adds, strips, and converts the S-VLAN tag. Supports the EVPL services that are based on QinQ. Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on QinQ (IEEE 802.1ad bridge).
NOTE

For the details of the QinQ service, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-125

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Ethernet Service QoS Processing


l

Supports the following traffic classifications:


PORT-based traffic classification PORT+VLAN-based traffic classification PORT+VLAN+VLAN PRI-based traffic classification PORT+SVLAN-based traffic classification PORT+CVLAN+SVLAN-based traffic classification

Supports four CoS types, namely, Simple, VLAN PRI, DSCP, and IP TOS, and allocates packets to different egress queues. Supports traffic-based CAR. Supports PORT queue-based traffic shaping. An Ethernet interface supports eight egress queues, and supports the SP+WRR queue scheduling mode.
NOTE

l l l

For details on the Ethernet QoS, see the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Ethernet OAM Processing


l

Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.1ag:


Management of OAM maintenance points Continuity check test Loopback test Link trace test Ping test Performance test OAM automatic discovery Link performance monitoring Fault detection Remote loopback initiating Selfloop detection and selfloop port blocking

Supports the following OAM functions specified in IEEE 802.3ah:


NOTE

For the details of the Ethernet OAM, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Encapsulation and Mapping of Ethernet Service Signals


l l l

Supports the GFP encapsulation format. Supports an uplink bandwidth of 63xE1. Supports virtual concatenation mapping at E1-Xv (X = 1-16). When implemented on the NMS, virtual concatenation mapping at E1-Xv is considered as virtual concatenation mapping at VC-12-Xv.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-126

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l

3 Boards

Supports LCAS.
NOTE

For details on encapsulation and mapping of Ethernet services, see the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Overhead Processing
l l

Queries the J2 and V5 bytes. Sets the J2 and V5 bytes.

Alarms and Performance Events


l l

Provides rich alarms and performance events. Supports alarm management functions such as setting the alarm reversion function and setting the BER threshold. Supports performance event management functions such as setting the performance threshold and setting the automatic reporting of 15-minute/24-hour performance events. Supports events and alarms.
NOTE

l l

For the details of alarm management functions and performance event management functions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. For the details of RMON performance, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Maintenance Features
l l l l l l l l

Supports port mirroring. Supports inloop in the PHY layer of Ethernet ports. Supports inloop in the MAC layer of Ethernet ports. Supports VC-12 inloop toward the backplane direction. Supports the transmitting and receiving of GFP test frames and Ethernet test frames. Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the detecting of the board temperature. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board.
NOTE

l l

For the details of the loopback function, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Maintenance Guide. Generally, when a warm reset is performed, the board software is reset but the services are not affected. When LAG protection is configured, however, a warm reset may result in packet loss. When a cold reset is performed, not only the board software is reset, but also the board is initialized. When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.14.3 Working Principle and Signal Flow


This section considers the processing of one FE signal as an example to describe the working principle of the EFP6.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-127

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-50 Principle block diagram of the EFP6
Backplane FE Interface module FE PXC

Service processing module

Encapsulation module

Mapping module

Logic processing unit

PXC

Control and communication module Service bus Control bus

Mail box

SCC

FE signal

Signal Processing Flow in the Receive Direction


Table 3-114 Signal processing flow in the receive direction of the EFP6 Proced ure 1 2 Functional Module Interface processing module Service processing module Processing Flow Performs reassembly, decoding, and serial/parallel conversion for the accessed FE signal. Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping, CRC code processing, and Ethernet performance counting for the frame signal. Classifies the traffic according to the service format and configuration requirements (for example, Ethernet packet, VLAN packet, and other packet format). Processes tags according to the service type. Forwards data frames according to the service type. 3 4 Encapsulation module Mapping module Performs GFP encapsulation for the Ethernet frames. Maps the encapsulated data frames based on E1 virtual concatenation and then encapsulates the data frames to the corresponding VC-12s. Transmits the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal to the PXC.

Logic processing unit

3-128

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Signal Processing Flow in the Transmit Direction


Table 3-115 Signal processing flow in the transmit direction of the EFP6 Proced ure 1 2 3 4 Functional Module Logic processing unit Mapping module Encapsulation module Service processing module Processing Flow Receives the VC-4 signal and pointer indication signal from the active PXC. Extracts the E1 payload from the VC-12s and demaps the E1 payload based on E1 virtual concatenation. Decapsulates the signal after the demapping. Performs frame delimitation, preamble adding, CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance counting. Forwards data frames according to the service type. Processes tags according to the service type. 5 Interface processing module Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding and sends the generated FE signal to the Ethernet interface.

Control Signal Processing Flow


The communication and control module of the EFP6 consists of the CPU and its peripheral circuits. The EFP6 communicates with the SCC through the mailbox. The configuration data and querying commands from the SCC are issued to the various units of the EFP6 through the communication and control module. The command response reported by the units inside the EFP6, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the SCC through the communication and control module.

3.14.4 Front Panel


There are indicators and six FE interfaces on the front panel.

Diagram of the Front Panel


Figure 3-51 Front panel of the EFP6
EFP6
STAT PROG SRV

FE1

FE2

FE3

FE4

FE5

FE6

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

EFP6

3-129

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicators
Table 3-116 Description of indicators on the EFP6 Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost. Off SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off The software is running normally. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

PROG

100 ms on (green), and 100 ms off

300 ms on (green), and 300 ms off

On (green) 100 ms on (red), and 100 ms off

On (red)

3-130

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interfaces
Table 3-117 Description of the interfaces on the EFP6 Interfac e FE1-FE6 Description Fast Ethernet service interface Type of Connector RJ-45 Corresponding Cable Network cable

The FE interfaces on the EFP6 support the MDI, MDI-X, and autosensing modes. For the front view and pin assignment of the RJ-45 connector, see Figure 3-52 and refer to Table 3-118 and Table 3-119. Figure 3-52 RJ-45 front view

87654321

Table 3-118 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) -

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-131

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 3-119 Pin assignments of the RJ-45 connector in the MDI-X mode Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) -

The RJ-45 interface has two indicators. For the meanings of the indicators, refer to Table 3-120. Table 3-120 RJ-45 Ethernet port indicator description Indicator Green indicator (LINK) Status On Off Yellow indicator (ACT) On or flashing Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

3.14.5 Valid Slots


The EFP6 can be installed in slots 4-8 of the IDU 620. Figure 3-53 Slots of the EFP6 in the IDU 620
EFP6 EXT FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT EFP6 EXT EFP6 EXT EFP6 SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EFP6 EXT PXC PXC

3-132

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-121 Slot Allocation for the SL1D Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 4 > slot 6 > slot 8 > slot 7 > slot 5

3.14.6 NM Configuration Reference


On the NMS, the board parameters that you may frequently set are SDH parameters, Ethernet external port parameters, and Ethernet internal port parameters.

SDH Parameters
Byte J2 is the SDH parameter that you may frequently set. The board supports the single-byte mode and 16-byte mode with CRC. By default, the board does not monitor the received J2 byte, that is, the J2 byte to be received is set to the disabled mode. The J2 byte to be sent is a 16-byte string with CRC. The first byte is automatically created and the other 15 bytes are the ASCII code "HuaWei SBS ". The last five characters of the string are blank spaces.

Ethernet External Port Parameters


The EFP6 provides six external ports, that is, PORT1 to PORT6. The parameters that you may frequently set for every external port are as follows:
l l l l l

Basic attributes TAG attributes Network attributes Flow control Advanced attributes

The basic attributes are applicable to all Ethernet services and include the following three parameters: port enabled, working mode, and maximum frame length.
l

Port enabled This parameter is used to control the enabled/disabled status of Ethernet ports. By default, this parameter is set to disabled.

Working mode In the case of FE electrical ports, there are four working modes: 10M half-duplex, 10M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 100M full-duplex and auto-negotiation . Set the working mode of the equipment on the local side depending on the working mode of the equipment on the opposite side. For the setting suggestions, refer to the OptiX RTN 620 Radio Transmission System Feature Description.

Maximum frame length The board supports a maximum frame length that ranges from 1518 to 2000 bytes. By default, the maximum frame length is 1522 bytes. This parameter should not be set smaller

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-133

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

than the maximum length of the Ethernet frame transmitted from the equipment on the opposite side. Usually, the default value can meet the requirement. The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. The TAG attributes include the following parameters:
l

TAG The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be set to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that do not contain a TAG. Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that contain a TAG. Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do not contain a TAG. In the case of the packets that do not contain a TAG, the port adds a TAG to the packets according to the VLAN ID of the port. In the case of the packets that contain a TAG, the port receives the packets without change.

Ingress check This parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparently transmits the received packet.

Default VLAN ID When the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for the port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 1095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1.

The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows:
l

UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes. C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag. S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

The board supports the following flow control modes: autonegotiation flow control mode and non-autonegotiation flow control mode. By default, the flow control mode is set to the disabled mode. The flow control parameter should be set depending on the flow control parameter of the equipment on the opposite side.
l

The autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

Disabled The port does not work in the autonegotiation flow control mode. Enable dissymmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.

Enable symmetric flow control


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-134

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames.

Enable symmetric/dissymmetric flow control The port has the following abilities:

Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and processing the received PAUSE frames Transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion and not processing the received PAUSE frames Processing the received PAUSE frames and not transmitting PAUSE frames during congestion

The non-autonegotiation flow control mode can be as follows:

Disabled The port does not work in the non-autonegotiation flow control mode. Send only The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion but cannot process the received PAUSE frames.

Receive only The port can process the received PAUSE frames but cannot transmit PAUSE frames during congestion.

Enable symmetric flow control The port can transmit PAUSE frames during congestion and process the received PAUSE frames.

The advanced attributes are used to set the broadcast packet suppression function. The broadcast packet suppression function prevents broadcast packets from affecting normal data services and also effectively prevents network attacks. The following parameters need to be set for the broadcast packet suppression function: Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression and Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold.
l

The Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter can be set to Enabled or Disabled.

When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Disabled, the port does not use the broadcast packet suppression function. When the Enabling Broadcast Packet Suppression parameter is set to Enabled, the port discards the received broadcast packets when the traffic of the received broadcast packets exceeds the set broadcast packet suppression threshold.

The Broadcast Packet Suppression Threshold parameter can be set to a value in the range from 1 to 10. When this parameter is set to N, the port discards the received broadcast packets when the ratio of the received broadcast packets to the total packets exceeds Nx10%.

Ethernet Internal Port Parameters


The EFP6 provides 16 internal ports, namely, VCTURNK1 to VCTRUNK16. The parameters that you may frequently set for each internal port are as follows: encapsulation/mapping protocol, network attribute, bound path, and LCAS.
l

The TAG attributes are used to specify whether and how the VLAN services are processed. The TAG attributes include the following parameters:
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-135

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

TAG The TAG parameter is used to identify the type of packets. The TAG parameter can be set to TAG aware, access, and hybrid. By default, the TAG parameter is set to TAG aware. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

Tag aware: The port allows only the packets that contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that do not contain a TAG. Access: The port allows only the packets that do not contain a TAG to pass, and discards the packets that contain a TAG. Hybrid: The port processes both the packets that contain a TAG and the packets that do not contain a TAG. The port adds a TAG to the packets that do not contain a TAG according to the VLAN ID of the port.

Ingress check This parameter is used to specify whether the TAG of a packet is checked. This parameter can be set to enabled or disabled. By default, this parameter is set to enabled. If this parameter is set to disabled, the TAG flag is invalid. In this case, the port transparently transmits the received packet.

Default VLAN ID When the TAG parameter is set to access or hybrid, you can set a default VLAN ID for the port. The default VLAN ID ranges from 1 to 1095. By default, the default VLAN ID is 1.

The network attributes are used to specify whether and how the QinQ services are processed. The network attribute of each port can be set to UNI, C-aware, or S-aware. By default, the network attribute of a port is UNI. The principles for processing packets are as follows:

UNI: The port processes the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The UNI port has the tag aware, access, and hybrid attributes. C-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet does not contain an S-VLAN tag. S-aware: The port does not process the TAG attributes of the 802.1Q-compliant packets. The port considers that the accessed packet contain a S-VLAN tag.

Bound path On the EFP6, a VCTRUNK can bind VC-12 channels (Ethernet services are encapsulated to the payload of VC-12 channels, namely, to E1 signals). A VCTRUNK can bind a maximum of 16 VC-12 channels.

LCAS The board supports the enabling/disabling of the LCAS function. By default, the LCAS function is disabled. The enabling status and parameter settings of the LCAS function should be the same as the enabling status and parameter settings of the equipment on the opposite side.

3.14.7 Technical Specifications


This section describes board specifications, including FE port performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

FE electrical Interface Performance


FE interfaces are 10/100BASE-T(X) interfaces and comply with IEEE 802.3. The following table provides the primary performance.
3-136 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Table 3-122 10/100BASE-T(X) interface performance Item Nominal bit rate (Mbit/s) Performance 10 (10BASE-T) 100 (100BASE-TX) Code pattern Manchester encoding signal (10BASE-T) MLT-3 encoding signal (100BASE-TX) Interface type RJ-45

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-123 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the EFP6 Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Performance 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 400 g < 11.6 W

3.15 PXC
The PXC is an integrated power cross-connect clock board. 3.15.1 Version Description The functional version of the PXC is SL61. 3.15.2 Functions and Features The PXC supports not only the cross-connection and timing functions, but also supplies power to other boards. 3.15.3 Working Principle This section describes the working principle of the PXC. 3.15.4 Front Panel There are indicators, external clock/wayside service ports, one power switch, and one label on the front panel. 3.15.5 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the PXC can be installed in slots 1 and 3. 3.15.6 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are all the clock parameters. 3.15.7 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including clock timing and synchronization performance, wayside service interface performance, mechanical behavior, and power consumption.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-137

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3.15.1 Version Description


The functional version of the PXC is SL61.

3.15.2 Functions and Features


The PXC supports not only the cross-connection and timing functions, but also supplies power to other boards.

Power Processing
l l l l

Receives one input of -48 V/-60 V power. Outputs one -48 V and one +3.3 V power for other boards. Supplies power to the components of the board. Detects and protects the input power.

Clock Processing
l

Traces the clock source and provides the system clock and frame headers of service signals and overhead signals for other boards. Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the system clock source. The service clock source can be line, tributary, or microwave clock source. Supports clock protection based on clock priority, SSM protocol, or extended SSM protocol. Supports the detection of the external clock source. Supports the trace, holdover, and free-run modes. One PXC supports one input and one output of the external clock. The external clock interface can be used as the wayside service interface. The external clock interface can transparently transmit DCC bytes, synchronous data overhead bytes, asynchronous data overhead bytes, and orderwire overhead bytes.

l l l l l

Cross-Connection Processing
l l l l l

Grooms inter-board service signals. Provides full timeslot cross-connection of VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 equivalent to 16x16 VC-4. Provides cross-connection of 16x16 pointer indication signals. Supports service signal broadcasting. Supports the AU_AIS alarm being transparently transmitted by the service path that VC-4s can pass through.

Protection Processing
l l l l

Supports 1+1 standby for the input power and 1+1 standby for the internal power module. Supports 1+1 hot standby of its clock unit and cross-connect unit. Supports the SNCP switching. Supports the linear MSP.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-138

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l l

3 Boards

Supports the two-fiber bidirectional MSP ring on STM-4 optical transmission links. Supports the HSB switching.

Maintenance Features
l l l l

Supports the warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the board temperature. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.
NOTE

When a warm reset is performed, the software modules of the SCC is reset, but the services are not affected. When a cold reset is performed, not only the software modules are reset, but also the board is initialized (if the board has the FPGA, the FPGA is reloaded). When a cold reset is performed, services can be interrupted.

3.15.3 Working Principle


This section describes the working principle of the PXC.

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-54 Block diagram of the PXC
Backplane External clock unit SCC Clock unit Other boards Crossconnect unit Service boards

SCC Logic control unit

-48V

Power unit

-48V Other boards +3.3V

Service bus Overhead bus

Clock signal Control bus

External clock signal

External Clock Unit


In the receive direction, the external clock unit accesses one 2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s signal. If the signal accessed is a wayside service signal, it is multiplexed into a 2M timeslot of an 8M overhead signal and then sent to the SCC. If the signal accessed is a clock signal, it is sent to the clock unit. In the transmit direction, to output the external clock, the unit receives an external clock signal from the clock unit. To output the wayside service signal, the unit demultiplexes the wayside service signal from the 8M overhead signal.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-139

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Clock Unit
The clock unit detects and selects the external clock source or the service clock source from service boards. Through the phase-locked loop, the unit outputs the system clock and frame headers of service signals and overhead signals for other units on the PXC and also other boards.

Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit is a three-level cross-connect matrix. The first level and the third level are space division cross-connect matrixes that support VC-4 cross-connection only, with a crossconnect capacity of 16x16 VC-4s. The first level is called forward cross-connection and the third level is called backward cross-connection. The second level is a time division matrix that supports VC-4/VC-3/VC-12 cross-connection, with the cross-connect capacity equivalent to 16x16 VC-4s. It is called lower order cross-connection. The lower order cross-connect matrix is the core of a cross-connect unit. The forward and backward cross-connect matrixes are used to improve the speed at which the cross-connect unit implements service protection switching. Figure 3-55 Cross-connect unit architecture
Forward cross-connect matrix 1#VC-4 Lower order cross-connect matrix Backward crossconnect matrix 1#VC-4

16#VC-4

Equivalent ... 16x16 VC-4 ... ... 16x16 VC-4 ... to 16x16 VC-4

16#VC-4

Power Unit
The power unit processes the input -48 V/-60 V power as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Uses a protection circuit to protect the board from very high input current. Uses a protection circuit to protect the board from reverse polar connection of the input power. Performs EMI filtering for the input current and detects whether the input current is very high or very low. Distributes one power input to the -48 V power bus in the backplane, to supply -48 V power to the SCC and IF boards. Uses a DC/AC power module to convert the other power input into +3.3 V power and then sends it to the +3.3 V power bus in the backplane, to supply +3.3 V power to the other boards.

The power unit also supplies power to the chips on the PXC.

Logic Control Unit


The board is directly controlled by the CPU of the SCC. The CPU issues configuration data and querying commands to the various units of the board through the control bus. The command
3-140 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

response reported by the units inside the board, and the alarms and performance events are reported to the CPU also through the control bus. The logic control unit decodes the address signals from the CPU of the SCC and loads the FPGA software.

3.15.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, external clock/wayside service ports, one power switch, and one label on the front panel.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-56 PXC front panel
PXC
STAT PWR SYNC ACT

NEG(-)

RTN(+)

PULL

CLKO

CLKI

Indicators
Table 3-124 PXC indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

PWR

On (green) On (red)

The power supply is working normally. The +3.3 V power supply is faulty, or the input -48 V power supply is abnormal. There is no power access. The clock is normal. The clock source is lost, or switching occurs to the clock source.

Off SYNC On (green) On (red)

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

PXC

-48V-60V

SYS-PWR

3-141

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator ACT

Status On (green)

Meaning The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).

Off

The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).

Interfaces
Table 3-125 PXC interface description Interface CLKI Description External clock/ wayside service input port External clock/ wayside service output port Power input (+) Power output (-) Input power switch Type-D Power cable Type of Connector SMB Cable External clock cable/wayside service cable

CLIO

RTN(+) NEG(-) SYS-PWRa

NOTE

a: The SYS-PWR switch is equipped with a lockup device. To move the switch, you need to first pull out the switch lever partially. When the switch is set to "O", it indicates that the circuit is open. When the switch is set to "I", it indicates that the circuit is closed.

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label and an operation guidance label on the front panel.
l

The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board. The operation guidance label suggests that you must pull the switch lever outwards slightly before setting the switch to the "I" or "O" position.
NOTE

There may be no operation guidance label on the front panel of the board that were delivered previously.

3-142

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

3.15.5 Valid Slots


In the IDU 620, the PXC can be installed in slots 1 and 3. Figure 3-57 Slots of the PXC in the IDU 620
EXT FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT EXT EXT SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT PXC PXC

Table 3-126 Slot assigning principle of the PXC Item Slot assigning priority in the case of the IDU 620 Description Slot 1 > slot 3

NOTE

When the system is powered on and the two PXCs are already seated, the PXC in slot 1 is the active board and the one in slot 3 is the standby. If one PXC is inserted when another is already in the working state, the existing board becomes the active board and the newly inserted board becomes the standby board.

3.15.6 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters that you may frequently set are all the clock parameters.

Clock Source and Clock Source Priority


Supports the selection of the external clock source or the service clock source to be the system clock source. The service clock source can be a line, tributary, or microwave clock source. Select the required clock source and then set the clock source priority. By default, the PXC employs the internal clock source, that is, the clock working in the free-run mode.

Clock Protection
For the PXC, clocks are protected based on the clock source priority, SSM, or extended SSM protocols. Determine the clock protection scheme as required. By default, the PXC protects clocks according to the clock source priority.

Input External Clock Parameter Setting


To input an external clock, set the type (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz) of the external clock. If the SSM or extended SSM protocols are enabled, also set the S1 byte of the external clock.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-143

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Output External Clock Parameter Setting


To output an external clock, set the type (2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz) of the external clock and also the clock source traced by the 2M phase-locked loop.

3.15.7 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including clock timing and synchronization performance, wayside service interface performance, mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

Clock Timing and Synchronization Performance


Table 3-127 Clock timing and synchronization performance Item External synchronization source Performance 2048 kbit/s (compliant with ITU-T G.703 9), or 2048 kHz (compliant with ITU-T G. 703 13) Compliant with ITU-T G.813

Frequency accuracy Pull-in, hold-in, and pull-out ranges Noise generation Noise tolerance Noise transfer Transient response and holdover performance

Wayside Service Interface Performance


Table 3-128 Wayside service interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 2048 One coaxial wire pair 75

3-144

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-129 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the PXC Item Dimensions Weight Power consumption Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 540 g < 7.5 W

3.16 SCC
The SCC is a system control and communication board. 3.16.1 Version Description The SCC has three functional versions: SL61SCCVER.B, SL61SCCVER.C and SL61SCCVER.E. 3.16.2 Functions and Features The SCC provides not only the system control and communication function, but also various management and auxiliary interfaces. 3.16.3 Working Principle This section describes the working principle of the SCC . 3.16.4 Front Panel There are indicators, management and auxiliary interfaces, one reset switch, one indicator test switch, and labels on the front panel. 3.16.5 Jumpers and Storage Card The SCC PCB board has one group of jumpers and one pluggable storage card. 3.16.6 Valid Slots In the IDU 620, the SCC is installed in slot 2. 3.16.7 NM Configuration Reference In the NM system, the board parameters you may frequently set are as follows: the NE ID/IP address, orderwire interface parameters, synchronous data interface parameters, and asynchronous data interface parameters. 3.16.8 Specifications This section describes the board specifications, including orderwire interface performance, synchronous data interface performance, asynchronous data interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

3.16.1 Version Description


The SCC has three functional versions: SL61SCCVER.B, SL61SCCVER.C and SL61SCCVER.E.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-145

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 3-130 Difference between the functional versions Item Synchronous data interface Orderwire spanning function Power module SL61SCCVER.B Does not provide the interface. Does not support the function. Provides the module. SL61SCCVER.C 1 Supports the function. Does not provide the module. SL61SCCVER.E 1 Supports the function. Provides the module.

3.16.2 Functions and Features


The SCC provides not only the system control and communication function, but also various management and auxiliary interfaces.

System Control and Communications


l

Provides the system control and communication function to manage the other boards and ODUs by using the NE software. Controls the other boards by using the board software that runs on the SCC. The board software of all the other boards except the EMS6 is integrated on the SCC. Collects performance events and alarms. Communicates with the NM system and processes at most 12-channel DCC. Cross-connects overheads.

l l l

Management and Auxiliary Interfaces


l l l l l

Provides one NM interface and one NE cascade interface. Provides one management serial port. Provides one 6-input and 2-output alarm interface. Provides one asynchronous data interface. Provides one 64 kbit/s G.703-compliant synchronous data interface (only the SL61SCC of VER.C or VER.E provides this function). Provides one orderwire interface. Supports the setting of the synchronous data interface as a transparent transmission interface for orderwire bytes to realize the orderwire spanning function (only the SL61SCC of VER.C or VER.E provides this function).

l l

Protection Processing
l l l l

Processes the protection switching of 1+1 protection configuration. Processes clock protection switching. Processes linear MSP switching. Processes the protection switching of a two-fiber bidirectional shared MSP ring.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

3-146

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description


l l

3 Boards

Processes SNCP switching. Provides +3.3 V power standby protection (Only the SL61SCC of VER.B or VER.E provides this function).

Maintenance Features
l l l l l

Supports warm resetting and cold resetting of the board. Supports the querying of the board temperature. Supports the detecting of all the indicators of the boards. Supports the querying of the manufacturing information of the board. Supports the in-service upgrade of the FPGA.

3.16.3 Working Principle


This section describes the working principle of the SCC .

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-58 Block diagram of the SCC
Orderwire interface External alarm input/output interface Asynchronous data interface Synchronous data interface Auxiliary interface unit Overhead crossconnect unit Backplane Other boards

Power unit NM interface NE cascade interface Debugging serial port Control and communication unit Control bus

-48V +3.3V

PXC Other boards Other boards IF1A/IF1B

Overhead bus

ODU control signal

NOTE

l l

The SL61SCC of VER.B does not have the synchronous data interface. The SL61SCC of VER.C does not have the power unit.

Auxiliary Interface Unit


The auxiliary interface unit of the SL61SCC of VER.C or VER.E processes the input and output of the orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, synchronous data interface, and external alarm interface. The input/output information of the external alarm interface is processed by the control and communication unit. The data of the orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, and synchronous data interface is interworked with the overhead cross-connect unit through the overhead bus. The auxiliary interface unit of the SL61SCC of VER.B processes the input and output of the orderwire interface, asynchronous data interface, and external alarm interface. The input/output
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-147

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

information of the external alarm interface is processed by the control and communication unit. The data of the orderwire interface and asynchronous data interface is interworked with the overhead cross-connect unit through the overhead bus.

Overhead Cross-Connect Unit


The overhead cross-connect unit cross-connects the overheads from the auxiliary unit, control and communication unit, and other boards, and thus the following functions are realized.
l

The DCC processed by the control and communication unit is added/dropped to/from the line. The orderwire and asynchronous data is added/dropped to/from the line. The orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between lines can be interworked.

l l

Control and Communication Unit


The control and communication unit is composed of a CPU and its peripheral circuit. This unit performs the following functions:
l

Controls and manages the IDU and other boards, and also collects alarms and performance events through the control bus. Controls and manages the ODU by the ODU control signal transmitted between the serial port and the SMODEM in the IF board. Communicates with the NM system by processing DCC bytes and the NM data that are transmitted from the NM interface. Performs configuration management, performance management, and alarm management according to NM commands. Performs protection management.

Power Unit
Only the SL61SCC of VER.B or VER.E provides the power unit. The power unit performs the following functions:
l l l

Converts the input -48 V power into +3.3 V power. Realizes the backup function of the internal power modules. Supplies power to the chips on the SCC.

3.16.4 Front Panel


There are indicators, management and auxiliary interfaces, one reset switch, one indicator test switch, and labels on the front panel.

3-148

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-59 SCC front panel
SCCVER.C and SCCVER.E
STAT PROG ALM MANT LAMP TEST RST

SCC

SYSTEM

COM

ETH

ETH-HUB

PHONE

ALM/AUX

SCCVER.B
STAT PROG ALM MANT LAMP TEST

SCC

RST

SYSTEM

COM

ETH

ETH-HUB

PHONE

ALM/S1

Indicators
Table 3-131 SCC indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

PROG

On: 100 ms (green) Off: 100 ms

When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initiated. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails.

On: 300 ms (green) Off: 300 ms

On (green) On: 100 ms (red) Off: 100 ms

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SCC

SCC

3-149

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

Status On (red)

Meaning
l

When the board is being powered on or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost. The pluggable storage card is faulty.

Off ALM On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off MANT On (yellow)

The software is running normally. The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. The system has no power access. The system is in the maintenance state. The maintenance state includes loopback, laser shutdown, and ODU transmitting in silence. The system is in the working state.

Off

Interfaces
Table 3-132 SCC interface description Interface PHONE COM ETH ETH-HUB
3-150

Description Orderwire interface Management port NM Ethernet interface NE cascade interface

Type of Connector RJ-11 DB9 RJ-45 RJ-45

Cable Orderwire line Serial port cable Network cable Network cable
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Interface ALM/AUX (SCCVER.C and SCCVER.E ) ALM/S1 (SCCVER.B)

Description
l

Type of Connector DB26

Cable Auxiliary interface cable

SCCVER.C and SCCVER.E : external alarm interface/ synchronous data interface/ asynchronous data interface SCCVER.B: external alarm interface/ asynchronous data interface

RST LAMP TEST

Ward reset switch Indicator test switcha

NOTE

a: Press the LAMP TEST button, and all the indicators of the IDU turn on except for the indicators on the Ethernet interface. Release the button, and the indicators return to the original state.

For the pin assignments of the COM interface, see Figure 3-60 and refer to Table 3-133. Figure 3-60 Pin assignments of the COM interface
Pos.1

Pos.9

Table 3-133 Pin assignments of the COM interface Interface COM Pin 2 3 4 5 1, 4, 6, 7, 8, 9 Signal Receiving data Transmitting data Data terminal ready Ground Reserved

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-151

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

For the pin assignments of the ETH or the ETH-HUB connector, see Figure 3-61 and refer to Table 3-134. Figure 3-61 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface

87654321

Table 3-134 Pin assignments of the ETH/ETH-HUB interface Interface ETH/ETH-HUB Pin 1 2 3 6 4, 5, 7, 8 Signal Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Reserved

NOTE

The ETH/ETH-HUB interface supports MDI/MDI-X auto-sensing, which means it can also transmit data through pins 3 and 6, and receive data through pins 1 and 3.

The ETH/ETH-HUB interface has two indicators. For the description of the two indicators, refer to Table 3-135. Table 3-135 ETH/ETH-HUB indicator description Indicator LINK (green) Status On Off ACT (yellow) On or flashing Off Meaning The link is normal. The link fails. The port is transmitting or receiving data. The port is not transmitting or receiving data.

3-152

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

CAUTION
The ETH and the ETH-HUB are like two ports of a hub. When the two ports are used in networking, they cannot be connected to each other through Ethernet links. Otherwise, an Ethernet loop is formed which can result in a network storm and repeated NE resetting. Figure 3-62 shows two wrong connection modes.

Figure 3-62 Wrong connection of the ETH and the ETH-HUB interfaces

STAT PROG ALM MANT LAMP TEST

RST

SCC

SYSTEM

COM

ETH

ETH-HUB

PHONE

ALM/AUX

LAN
STAT PROG ALM MANT LAMP TEST RST

SCC

SYSTEM

COM

ETH

ETH-HUB

PHONE

ALM/AUX

For the pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface, see Figure 3-63 and refer toTable 3-136. Figure 3-63 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX interface
Pos.1

Pos.26

Table 3-136 Pin assignments of the ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) interface Interface ALM/AUX (ALM/S1) Pin 1 10 19
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Signal The 1st input alarm signal Ground of the 1st input alarm signal The 2nd input alarm signal
3-153

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

SCC

SCC

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Interface

Pin 2 11 20 3 21 4 13 22 5 14 23 6 24 16 8 25 7 9 12 15 17 18, 26

Signal Ground of the 2nd input alarm signal The 3rd input alarm signal Ground of the 3rd input alarm signal The 1st output alarm signal (+) The 1st output alarm signal (-) The 4th input alarm signal Ground of the 4th input alarm signal The 5th input alarm signal Ground of the 5th input alarm signal The 6th input alarm signal Ground of the 6th input alarm signal The 2nd output alarm signal (+) The 2nd output alarm signal (-) The asynchronous interface transmitting data The asynchronous interface receiving data Signal ground The synchronous data interface receiving data (+) Signal ground The synchronous data interface receiving data (-) The synchronous data interface transmitting data (+) The synchronous data interface transmitting data (-) Reserved

NOTE

The SCC of VER.B does not support the synchronous data interface. Hence, pins 7, 12, 15, and 17 of the ALM/AUX interface cannot be used.

3-154

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Labels
There is a high temperature warning label and an operation warning label on the front panel. The high temperature warning label suggests that the board surface temperature may exceed 70 C when the ambient temperature is higher than 55C. In this case, you need to wear protective gloves before touching the board.

3.16.5 Jumpers and Storage Card


The SCC PCB board has one group of jumpers and one pluggable storage card. The storage card stores the following information:
l l l l

All the data of the NE, including the NE ID, NE IP address, and service data NE software and all the board software programs All the FPGA logics License file for radio link capability

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-155

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Figure 3-64 Positions of the jumpers and storage card


SL61SCCVER.C or SL61SCCVER.E

1 2

JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1

Jumper definition 1 2 JUMP4 JUMP3 JUMP2 JUMP1

SL61SCCVER.B 9 2 1 10

JUMP1 JUMP2 JUMP3 JUMP4


1. Jumpers 2. Storage card

Table 3-137 Setting the jumpers Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: short circuit) JUMP4 0 0 0 0 JUMP3 0 0 0 0 JUMP2 0 0 1 1 JUMP1 0 1 0 1 Normal operating state. Reserved. Reserved. Commissioning state. Function

3-156

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: short circuit) JUMP4 0 JUMP3 1 JUMP2 0 JUMP1 0

Function

Operating state, with the WatchDog disabled and memory undergone full check. BIOS holdover state. Even if the NE software exists, it is not running. The IP address is always 129.9.0.5. The IP in the parameter area does not change for the convenience of querying. Exhibition mode. Data recover state. Reserved. Reserved. To erase the system parameter area. To erase database. To erase NE software and its patches. To erase database, NE software and its patches.

0 0 1 1 1

1 1 0 0 0

1 1 0 0 1

0 1 0 1 0

1 1

0 1

1 0

1 0

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-157

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Jumper Setting (1: disconnected, 0: short circuit) JUMP4 1 JUMP3 1 JUMP2 1 JUMP1 0

Function

To format the file system so that all the data is erased. To format the file system so that all the data is erased (file system + extended BIOS + system parameter area).

3.16.6 Valid Slots


In the IDU 620, the SCC is installed in slot 2. Figure 3-65 Slot of the SCC in the IDU 620
EXT FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT EXT EXT SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT PXC PXC

NOTE

An SCC integrates an EOW subboard which occupies the logical slot 21.

3.16.7 NM Configuration Reference


In the NM system, the board parameters you may frequently set are as follows: the NE ID/IP address, orderwire interface parameters, synchronous data interface parameters, and asynchronous data interface parameters.

NE ID
The NE ID is a 24-bit hexadecimal number, which is used to identify the NE in ECC communication. The higher 8 bits of an NE ID are called the subnet ID, or the extended ID, whereas the lower 16 bits are called the basic ID. For example, for the NE ID 0x090001, "9" is the subnet ID or extended ID and "1" is the basic ID. By default, the NE ID is 0x09BFF0, with the subnet ID or extended ID as "9" and the basic ID as "49136".
3-158 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

NE IP Address
IP addresses are used and thus are valid only in TCP/IP communication. By default, the NE IP address is 129.9.191.240.

Orderwire Interface Parameters


Orderwire interface parameters include the orderwire phone number and the overhead byte used to transmit orderwire. The orderwire phone number is used to identify the phone in point-to-point addressing call. This parameter is set based on the orderwire planning. Generally, the orderwire phone number is set with three digits. The overhead byte used to transmit orderwire can be set to use the E1 or E2 byte, however, this setting is invalid for SDH/PDH microwave links because the microwave system always uses a microwave self-defined byte to transmit orderwire, regardless of whether the E1 or E2 byte is set.

Synchronous Data Interface Parameters


In the case of optical and electrical SDH lines, the synchronous data interface always uses the F1 byte. In the case of SDH/PDH microwave links, the synchronous data interface always uses a microwave self-defined byte.

Asynchronous Interface Parameters


Asynchronous interface parameters include the asynchronous data interface type and the overhead byte used to transmit asynchronous data. The asynchronous data interface type is RS-232. The overhead byte used to transmit asynchronous data can be set to any byte of Serial 1 to Serial 4, as shown in Figure 3-66. This setting is, however, invalid for SDH/PDH microwave links because the microwave system always uses a microwave self-defined byte to transmit orderwire, regardless of which serial byte is set. Figure 3-66 Positions of Serial 1 to Serial 4 overhead bytes in an SDH frame
A1 B1 D1 AU - PTR B2 D4 D7 D10 S1 B2 Serial 4 B2 K1 D5 D8 D11 M1 K2 D6 D9 D12 E2 Serial 3 A1 A1 A2 E1 D2 A2 A2 J0 F1 D3 Serial 1 Serial 2

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-159

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3.16.8 Specifications
This section describes the board specifications, including orderwire interface performance, synchronous data interface performance, asynchronous data interface performance, board mechanical behavior, and power consumption.

Orderwire Interface Performance


Table 3-138 Orderwire interface performance Item Transmission path Orderwire type Wire pair in each transmission direction Impedance (ohm) Performance Uses the E1 and E2 bytes in the SDH overhead or the Huaweidefined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. Addressing call One symmetrical wire pair 600

NOTE

The OptiX RTN equipment supports the orderwire group call function. For example, when an OptiX RTN equipment calls the number of 888, the orderwire group call number, the orderwire phones of all the OptiX RTN equipment in the orderwire subnet ring until a phone is answered. Then, a point-to-point orderwire phone call is established.

Synchronous Data Interface Performance


Table 3-139 Synchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface type Interface characteristics Performance Uses the F1 byte in the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 64 Codirectional Meets the ITU-T G.703 standard.

3-160

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Asynchronous Data Interface


Table 3-140 Asynchronous data interface performance Item Transmission path Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) Interface characteristics Performance Uses the user-defined byte of the SDH overhead or the Huawei-defined byte in the overhead of the microwave frame. 19.2 Meets the RS-232 standard.

Mechanical Behavior and Power Consumption


Table 3-141 Mechanical behavior and power consumption of the SCC Item Dimensions Weight Description 203.6 mm x 201.3 mm x 19.6 mm (width x depth x height) 500g (SCCVER.B) 330g (SCCVER.C) 510g (SCCVER.E) Power consumption < 7.0 W

3.17 Fan Tray Assembly


The IDU 620 adopts wind-cooling and thus is configured with the fan tray assembly. 3.17.1 Composition The fan tray assembly is composed of the front panel, air filter, and fan board. In a dust-proof environment such as an outdoor cabinet, the fan tray assembly is configured with no air filter. 3.17.2 Version Description The fan board in the fan tray assembly has two functional versions, namely, SL61FAN and SL61FANA. 3.17.3 Functions and Features The fan tray assembly is used to dissipate heat from the IDU by using the method of wind cooling. 3.17.4 Working Principle This section considers the SL61FANA version as an example to describe the working principle of the fan board in the fan tray assembly. 3.17.5 Front Panel There is the fan status indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly. 3.17.6 Valid Slots The fan tray assembly is installed on the left side of the IDU 620 and occupies slot 20.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-161

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3.17.1 Composition
The fan tray assembly is composed of the front panel, air filter, and fan board. In a dust-proof environment such as an outdoor cabinet, the fan tray assembly is configured with no air filter. Figure 3-67 Fan tray assembly composition

Air filter

Panel

Fan board

3.17.2 Version Description


The fan board in the fan tray assembly has two functional versions, namely, SL61FAN and SL61FANA. Table 3-142 Differences between SL61FAN and SL61FANA Item Number of fans Power SL61FAN 6 -48 V SL61FANA 3 +3.3 V

3.17.3 Functions and Features


The fan tray assembly is used to dissipate heat from the IDU by using the method of wind cooling. The fan tray assembly also supports the following functions:
l l

Detecting faults in the fan and reports alarms. Querying the manufacturing information.

3.17.4 Working Principle


This section considers the SL61FANA version as an example to describe the working principle of the fan board in the fan tray assembly.
3-162 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Principle Block Diagram


Figure 3-68 Block diagram of the fan board
Backplane Fan unit Control and detection unit +3.3V +12V Power unit +3.3V

SCC

Power Unit
The power unit converts the input +3.3 V power into the +12 V power according to the requirement of the fan unit. The 1+1 power standby protection is also provided for the system. In addition, the power unit provides +3.3 V power for the control and detection unit.

Fan Unit
The fan unit consists of three fans that work at the same time to dissipate heat from the IDU. The fan unit integrates a detection circuit, so that the fan unit can report the fan status and alarms to the control and detection unit.

Control and Detection Unit


Point-to-point communication is performed between the control and detection unit and the SCC. The functions of the control and detection unit are as follows:
l l

Reports the fan status and alarms to the SCC. Provides the manufacturing information for the SCC.

3.17.5 Front Panel


There is the fan status indicator on the front panel of the fan tray assembly.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-163

3 Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 3-69 FAN front panel

FAN

CLEAN PERIODICALLY

ATTENTION

!
DON'T TOUCH THE FAN LEAVE !

Indicators
Table 3-143 FAN indicator description Indicator FAN Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The fan is working normally. The fan is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access.

3.17.6 Valid Slots


The fan tray assembly is installed on the left side of the IDU 620 and occupies slot 20.

3-164

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

3 Boards

Figure 3-70 Slot of the fan tray assembly in the IDU 620
EXT FAN
Slot 20

Slot7 Slot5 Slot3 Slot1

EXT EXT EXT SCC

Slot8 Slot6 Slot4 Slot2

EXT PXC PXC

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

3-165

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

4
About This Chapter

Accessories

The accessories of the IDU include the E1 panel and the power distribution unit (PDU). You can select the accessories depending on the requirements. 4.1 E1 Panel When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU. 4.2 PDU The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-1

4 Accessories

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

4.1 E1 Panel
When an IDU is installed in a 19-inch cabinet, you can install an E1 panel in the cabinet. The E1 panel can function as the DDF of the IDU. The dimensions of the E1 panel are 483 mm x 33 mm x 42 mm (width x depth x height). An E1 panel provides cable distribution for 16 E1s.

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 4-1 Front panel of an E1 panel
R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 R9 R10 R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 R16 1-8 T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9 T10 T11 T12 T13 T14 T15 T16 9-16

Interfaces
Table 4-1 Interface description of an E1 panel Interface T1-T16 Description Transmit port of the 1st to 16th E1 ports (connected to the external equipment) Receive port of the 1st to 16th E1 ports (connected to the external equipment) 1st to 8th E1 ports (connected to an IDU) 9th to 16th E1 ports (connected to an IDU) Connecting a protection ground cable DB37 Type of Connector BNC

R1-R16

1-8 9-16 Grounding bolt

NOTE

The interface impedance of each E1 port on an E1 panel is 75 ohms.

For the pin assignments of the E1 port that is connected to an IDU, see Figure 4-2 and refer to Table 4-2.

4-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Figure 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel)

Pos. 1

Pos. 37

Table 4-2 Pin assignments of an E1 port (E1 panel) Pin 20 2 22 4 24 6 26 8 36 17 34 15 32 13 Signal 1st E1 receiving differential signal (+) 1st E1 receiving differential signal (-) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 2nd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (+) 3rd E1 receiving differential signal (-) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 4th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 5th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 6th E1 receiving differential signal (-) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 7th E1 receiving differential signal (-) Pin 21 3 23 5 25 7 27 9 35 16 33 14 31 12 Signal 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 1st E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 2nd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 3rd E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 4th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 5th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 6th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 7th E1 transmitting differential signal (-)
4-3

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4 Accessories

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Pin 30 11 Others

Signal 8th E1 receiving differential signal (+) 8th E1 receiving differential signal (-) Reserved

Pin 29 10 -

Signal 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (+) 8th E1 transmitting differential signal (-) -

4.2 PDU
The PDU is installed on the top of a 19-inch cabinet. The PDU is used to distribute the input power to the equipment in the cabinet. 4.2.1 Front Panel There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of the PDU. 4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power to the equipment in a cabinet. 4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode The IF1A and IF0A boards support two power distribution modes: DC-I and DC-C. The default power distribution mode is the DC-C mode.

4.2.1 Front Panel


There are input power terminals, PGND terminals, output power terminals, and power switches on the front panel of the PDU.

4-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

Front Panel Diagram


Figure 4-3 PDU front panel
1 2 3 4

OUTPUT

B
ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)

OUTPUT

ON

OFF
20A 20A 20A 20A

INPUT

OFF
20A 20A 20A 20A

5
1. Output power terminals (A) 3. Input power terminals 5. Power switches (A) 2. PGND 4. Output power terminals (B) 6. Power switches (B)

Interfaces
Table 4-3 PDU interface description Position Output power terminals (A) PGND Interface + (Grounding stud of the twohole OT terminal) RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-) Output power terminals (B) + Description Power output (+) Power output (-) For connecting the protection grounding cable

Input power terminals

The 1st power input (+) The 2nd power input (+) The 1st power input (-) The 2nd power input (-) Power output (+) Power output (-)
4-5

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4 Accessories

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Position Power switches (A)

Interface 20 A

Description They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the A side respectively. They are switches for the power outputs. The fuse capacity is 20 A. The switches from the left to the right correspond to output power terminals 1-4 on the B side respectively.

Power switches (B)

20 A

4.2.2 Functions and Working Principle


The PDU realizes the simple power distribution function. The PDU distributes the input power to the equipment in a cabinet.

Functions
l l l l

The PDU supports two inputs of -48 V/-60 V DC power. Each input power supply supports four outputs. The fuse capacity of the switch of each power output is 20 A. The PDU supports the DC-C and DC-I power distribution modes.

Working Principle
The PDU primarily consists of input terminals, output terminals, and miniature circuit breakers (MCBs). The PDU provides the simple power distribution function for the input power. Figure 4-4 Block diagram of the PDU working principle

OUTPUT A
+ SW1 + + SW3 + SW4 1 2

INPUT
RTN1(+) BGND RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)

SW2

OUTPUT B
+

BGND

SW1

+ +

1 2

SW2 SW4

PGND

SW4

4-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

4 Accessories

4.2.3 Power Distribution Mode


The IF1A and IF0A boards support two power distribution modes: DC-I and DC-C. The default power distribution mode is the DC-C mode. The power distribution mode of the PDU is controlled by the short-circuiting copper bar that is inside the PDU.

DC-C Power Distribution Mode


When the DC-C power distribution mode is used, the short-circuiting copper bar short-circuits terminal RTN1(+), terminal RTN2(+), and the PGND. Figure 4-5 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-C mode

DC-I Power Distribution Mode


To use the DC-I power distribution mode, remove the short-circuiting copper bar.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

4-7

4 Accessories

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Figure 4-6 Internal structure of the PDU in the DC-I mode

4-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

5
About This Chapter

Cables

This section describes the purpose, appearance, and connections of various cables of the IDU. 5.1 Power Cable The power cable connects the power supply system such as the power distribution box on the top of the cabinet to the PXC of the IDU to carry the -48 V power into the OptiX RTN 620 system. 5.2 Protection Ground Cable The IDU, ODU, and E1 panel need to be grounded through their own protection ground cables. 5.3 IF Jumper The IF jumper is used to connect the ODU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used together with the IF cable to transmit the IF signal between the ODU and the IDU, O&M signal, and -48 V power. 5.4 XPIC Cable The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX boards of the XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function. 5.5 Fiber Jumper Fiber jumpers are used to transmit optical signals. Fiber jumpers use LC/PC connectors at one end to connect the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface. The connectors at the other end of fiber jumpers depend on the type of optical interfaces of the equipment to be connected. 5.6 E1 Cable The E1 cables are available in four types: the E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables to the E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables. 5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e Cable External clock cables, wayside service cables, and STM-1e cables use the same type of coaxial cables. This type of coaxial cable uses the SMB connector at one end to connect the PXC, SLE/ SDE or PL3 board. The other end of the cable connects the DDF. The connectors are made as required by the site. 5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable Auxiliary interface cables are used to input/output external alarms, synchronous interface data, and asynchronous interface data. The cable uses a DB26 connector at one end to connect to the
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-1

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

ALM/AUX interface on the SCC board. The other end of the cable is divided into four wires, which are wire W1, wire W2, wire W3, and wire W4. Wire W4 is terminated with one DB37 connector and is connected to the external alarm equipment through an alarm transfer cable. Wire W2 is terminated with one DB9 connector and is connected to the equipment that is used to transmit asynchronous data through a serial port cable. Wire W1 is also terminated with one DB9 connector but the DB9 connector is reserved for future use. Wire W3 is not terminated with a connector and is used to transmit synchronous data. 5.9 External Alarm Transit Cable External alarm transit cables are used to transit external alarm data. The cable uses the DB37 connector at one end to connect the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable. The other end of the cable connects external alarm equipment. The connectors are made as required by the site. The external alarm transit cable transits two alarm outputs and six alarm inputs. 5.10 Serial Port Cable Serial port cables are used for the management and maintenance of the OptiX RTN 620. The cable uses the DB9 connectors at both ends, one for connecting the COM interface of the SCC board, the other for connecting the computer, NM serial, or modem. Serial port cables are also used to transit asynchronous data services. In this case, the cable connects the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable and the equipment that transmits asynchronous data. 5.11 Orderwire Line The orderwire line is used to connect orderwire phone sets. Both ends of the line use RJ-11 connectors. One end connects the PHONE interface of the SCC board and the other end connects the interface of the orderwire phone set. 5.12 Network Cable Network cables are used to connect Ethernet equipment. Both ends of a network cable use RJ-45 connectors.

5-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

5.1 Power Cable


The power cable connects the power supply system such as the power distribution box on the top of the cabinet to the PXC of the IDU to carry the -48 V power into the OptiX RTN 620 system.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-1 Diagram of the power cable
Two cable ties A 1 M020 Main label Label 2

A3 A2 A1

X3 A

X1 100mm L
1. Cable connector, type-D, 3 female

X2 200mm 500mm

2. Single cord end terminal

Cable Connection Table


Table 5-1 Power cable connections Cable Connector X1.A1 X1.A3 Cord End Terminal X2 X3 Connections A1 connects to X2. A3 connects to X3. Color of Core Wire Blue (-48 V power) Black (power ground)

5.2 Protection Ground Cable


The IDU, ODU, and E1 panel need to be grounded through their own protection ground cables. 5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-3

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

The protection ground cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet so that the IDU and other equipment share the same ground. 5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 Panel The protection ground cable connects the left ground screw of an E1 panel to the ground point of the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet, so that the E1 panel and other equipment share one ground.

5.2.1 IDU Protection Ground Cable


The protection ground cable connects the left ground point of the IDU to the ground point of the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet so that the IDU and other equipment share the same ground.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-2 Diagram of the IDU protection ground cable
Main label 1 Cable Tie H.S.Tube

L 1. Bare crimping terminal, OT 2. Bare crimping terminal, OT2

Cable Connection Table


None.

5.2.2 E1 Protection Ground Cable of an E1 Panel


The protection ground cable connects the left ground screw of an E1 panel to the ground point of the external equipment such as the ground support of a cabinet, so that the E1 panel and other equipment share one ground.

5-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-3 Diagram of the protection ground cable of an E1 panel
Main label 1

L 1. Bare crimping terminal, OT

Cable Connection Table


None.

5.3 IF Jumper
The IF jumper is used to connect the ODU and IF cable. The IF jumper is used together with the IF cable to transmit the IF signal between the ODU and the IDU, O&M signal, and -48 V power.
NOTE

No IF jumper is required if the 5D type IF cable is used. The 5D type IF cable is connected to the IF board through a TNC connector. For details about the IF cable, see ODU Hardware Description.

The IF jumper is a 2 m RG223 cable. The IF jumper uses a type-N connector at one end to connect to the IF cable, and a TNC connector at the other end to connect to the IF board.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-5

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-4 View of the IF jumper
1 H.S.tube 2Pcs L=3cm 2

2000mm 1. RF coaxial cable connector, TNC, male 2. RF coaxial cable connector, type-N, female

Cable Connection Table


None.

5.4 XPIC Cable


The XPIC cable is used to transmit the reference IF signal between the two IFX boards of the XPIC working group to realize the XPIC function. The XPIC cable is an RG316 cable with SMA connectors at both ends. One end of the XPIC cable is connected to the XPIC IN port of one IFX board of an XPIC working group, and the other end of the XPIC cable is connected to the XPIC OUT port of the other IFX board of the same XPIC working group. When the XPIC function of an IFX board is disabled, use an XPIC cable to connect the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port of the IFX board to loop back signals. The XPIC cable is available in the following two types:
l

XPIC cable using angle connectors: The XPIC cable using angle connectors is very long, and is used to connect the two IFX boards in the horizontal direction, for example, the IFX boards in slots 5 and 6 or the IFX boards in slots 7 and 8. XPIC cable using straight connectors: The XPIC cable using straight connectors is very short, and is used to connect the two IFX boards in the vertical direction, for example, the IFX boards in slots 5 and 7 or the IFX boards in slots 6 and 8. The XPIC cable using straight connectors is also used to connect the XPIC IN port and XPIC OUT port of the same IFX board to loop back signals.

5-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-5 View of the XPIC cable
1 1

L1 2 2

L2
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, angle, male 2. Coaxial cable connector, SMA, straight, male

Cable Connection Table


None.

5.5 Fiber Jumper


Fiber jumpers are used to transmit optical signals. Fiber jumpers use LC/PC connectors at one end to connect the SDH optical interface or GE optical interface. The connectors at the other end of fiber jumpers depend on the type of optical interfaces of the equipment to be connected.

Types of fiber jumpers


Table 5-2 Types of fiber jumpers Connector 1 LC/PC Connector 2 FC/PC Type of Fiber Jumper 2-mm single-mode fiber 2-mm multi-mode fiber LC/PC SC/PC 2-mm single-mode fiber 2-mm multi-mode fiber
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-7

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Connector 1 LC/PC

Connector 2 LC/PC

Type of Fiber Jumper 2-mm single-mode fiber 2-mm multi-mode fiber

NOTE

FThe Ie-1.1 optical interface and the 1000Base-SX GE optical interface use multi-mode fibers.

Fiber Connectors
The following figures show three common types of fiber connectors. They are LC/PC connectors, SC/PC connectors, and FC/PC connectors. Figure 5-6 LC/PC fiber connector

Figure 5-7 SC/PC fiber connector

5-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Figure 5-8 FC/PC fiber connector

5.6 E1 Cable
The E1 cables are available in four types: the E1 cables (with DB44 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment, the E1 cables to the E1 panel, and the E1 transit cables. The following E1 cables can be delivered together with the equipment:
l l l

The E1 cables to the external equipment(with DB44 connectors) The E1 cables to the E1 panel (DB44-DB37) The E1 transit cables (MDR68-DB44)

The E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment need to be made on site by terminating network cables with RJ-45 connectors. The description of the E1 cables (with RJ-45 connectors) to the external equipment is not provided in this topic. 5.6.1 DB44 E1 Cable When the SL61PO1/PH1 board directly inputs/outputs E1 signals from/to the external equipment, use this DB44 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the external equipment. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1 board. Make a connector for the other end that is near the external equipment as required by the site. 5.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 Cable When an IDU uses an E1 panel as the DDF, use this DB44-DB37 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the E1 panel. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1 board, and use a DB37 connector at the other end that is near the E1 panel. 5.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 Cable An MDR68-DB44 E1 cable is used to transit an E1 port of a PD1 board. The cable uses an MDR68 connector at one end to connect a PD1 board, and uses a DB44 connector at the other end to connect an DB44 E1 cable or an DB44-DB37 E1 panel.
Issue 02 (2010-03-30) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 5-9

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5.6.1 DB44 E1 Cable


When the SL61PO1/PH1 board directly inputs/outputs E1 signals from/to the external equipment, use this DB44 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the external equipment. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1 board. Make a connector for the other end that is near the external equipment as required by the site. The DB44 E1 cables that are connected to the external equipment are categorized into 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair cables, and one E1 cable transmits eight E1 signals. The 75-ohm coaxial cables are further categorized into 2x8 core cables and 1x16 core cables.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-9 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (2x8 core cable)
A Pos.44 1

Pos.1 A

Main label Label 1 W1 Label 1

Label 2 L
1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male

W2

Label 2

Label 1: W1 (E1: 1 to 4)

Label 2: W2 (E1: 5 to 8)

5-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Figure 5-10 Diagram of the 75-ohm cable (1x16 core cable)


A Pos.44 1

Pos.1 A

Main label W

L
1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male

Figure 5-11 Diagram of the 120-ohm cable


A Pos.44 1

Pos.1 A

Main label Label 1 W1 Label 1

Label 2 L
1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male

W2

Label 2

Label 1: W1 (TX1 to TX8)

Label 2: W2 (RX1 to RX8)

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-11

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Cable Connection Table


Table 5-3 75-ohm E1 cable connections (2x8 core cable) Pin Cable W1 Core Serial Numbe r 1 Remark s Pin Cable W2 Core Serial Numbe r 1 Remark s

38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 Shell

Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid

R1

34 19

Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid

R5

R2

33 18

R6

R3

32 17

R7

R4

31 16

R8

T1

11 26

T5

T2

10 25

T6

T3

9 24

T7

T4

8 7 Shell

T8

Table 5-4 75-ohm E1 cable connections (1x16 core cable) Pin Cable W Core Serial Numbe r 1 Remark s Pin Cable W Core Serial Numbe r 9 Remark s

38 23 37
5-12

Ring Tip Ring

R1

34 19

Ring Tip Ring

R5

R2

33

11

R6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Pin

Cable W Core Serial Numbe r

Remark s

Pin

Cable W Core Serial Numbe r

Remark s

22 36 21 35 20 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 Shell

Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid 8 T4 6 T3 4 T2 2 T1 7 R4 5 R3

18 32 17 31 16 11 26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Shell

Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Ring Tip Braid 16 T8 14 T7 12 T6 10 T5 15 R8 13 R7

Table 5-5 120-ohm E1 cable connections Pin Cable W1 Color 15 30 14 29 13 28 12 27 11 Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Grey Pair T5 Pair T4 Pair T3 Pair T2 Relatio n Pair Remark s Pin Cable W2 Color 38 23 37 22 36 21 35 20 34 Blue White Orange White Green White Brown White Grey Pair R5 Pair R4 Pair R3 Pair R2 Relatio n Pair Remark s

T1

R1

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-13

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Pin

Cable W1 Color Relatio n

Remark s

Pin

Cable W2 Color Relatio n

Remark s

26 10 25 9 24 8 7 Shell

White Blue Red Orange Red Green Red Braid Pair T8 Pair T7 Pair T6

19 33 18 32 17 31 16 Shell

White Blue Red Orange Red Green Red Braid Pair R8 Pair R7 Pair R6

5.6.2 DB44-DB37 E1 Cable


When an IDU uses an E1 panel as the DDF, use this DB44-DB37 E1 cable to connect the SL61PO1/PH1 board to the E1 panel. Use a DB44 connector at the end of the E1 cable that is near the SL61PO1/PH1 board, and use a DB37 connector at the other end that is near the E1 panel. Each E1 cable can transmit eight E1 signals. The interface impedance of the E1 cable is 75 ohms.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-12 Diagram of the DB44-DB37 E1 cable
Pos.1 A 1 B Pos.1 Pos.37 B 2

Pos.44 A

1500 mm
1. Cable connector, type-D, 44 male 2. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male

5-14

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Connection Table


Table 5-6 Connection table of the DB44-DB37 E1 cabl Connector X1 X1.38 X1.23 X1.37 X1.22 X1.36 X1.21 X1.35 X1.20 X1.15 X1.30 X1.14 X1.29 X1.13 X1.28 X1.12 X1.27 Shell Connector X2 X2.20 X2.2 X2.22 X2.4 X2.24 X2.6 X2.26 X2.8 X2.21 X2.3 X2.23 X2.5 X2.25 X2.7 X2.27 X2.9 Braid T4 T3 T2 T1 R4 R3 R2 Remarks R1 Connector X1 X1.34 X1.19 X1.33 X1.18 X1.32 X1.17 X1.31 X1.16 X1.11 X1.26 X1.10 X1.25 X1.9 X1.24 X1.8 X1.7 Shell Connector X2 X2.36 X2.17 X2.34 X2.15 X2.32 X2.13 X2.30 X2.11 X2.35 X2.16 X2.33 X2.14 X2.31 X2.12 X2.29 X2.10 Braid T8 T7 T6 T5 R8 R7 R6 Remarks R5

5.6.3 MDR68-DB44 E1 Cable


An MDR68-DB44 E1 cable is used to transit an E1 port of a PD1 board. The cable uses an MDR68 connector at one end to connect a PD1 board, and uses a DB44 connector at the other end to connect an DB44 E1 cable or an DB44-DB37 E1 panel. An E1 transit cable can be connected to a 75-ohm E1 port or a 120-ohm E1 port.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-15

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-13 Diagram of the MDR68-D44 E1 cable
400 mm Label2 B Pos.68 Main Label W2 A W1 Pos.1 X1 X3 Pos.44

Pos.1

Label1

X2

1. Cable connector, type-MDR, 68 male Label 1: "CHAN 0-7"

2. Cable connector, type-D, 44 female Label 2: "CHAN 8-15"

Cable Connection Table


Table 5-7 MDR68-DB44 E1 cable connections Wire W1 Connecto r X1 X1.35 X1.36 X1.37 X1.38 X1.39 X1.40 X1.41 X1.42 X1.43 X1.44 X1.45 X1.46 X1.47
5-16

Connecto r X2/X3 X2.38 X2.23 X2.15 X2.30 X2.37 X2.22 X2.14 X2.29 X2.36 X2.21 X2.13 X2.28 X2.35

Remarks R1

Connecto r X1 X1.2 X1.1

Connecto r X2/X3 X2.34 X2.19 X2.11 X2.26 X2.33 X2.18 X2.10 X2.25 X2.32 X2.17 X2.9 X2.24 X2.31

Remarks R5

T1

X1.4 X1.3

T5

R2

X1.6 X1.5

R6

T2

X1.8 X1.7

T6

R3

X1.10 X1.9

R7

T3

X1.12 X1.11

T7

R4

X1.14

R8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Wire

Connecto r X1 X1.48 X1.49 X1.50

Connecto r X2/X3 X2.20 X2.12 X2.27 X3.38 X3.23 X3.15 X3.30 X3.37 X3.22 X3.14 X3.29 X3.36 X3.21 X3.13 X3.28 X3.35 X3.20 X3.12 X3.27 Braid

Remarks

Connecto r X1 X1.13

Connecto r X2/X3 X2.16 X2.8 X2.7 X3.34 X3.19 X3.11 X3.26 X3.33 X3.18 X3.10 X3.25 X3.32 X3.17 X3.9 X3.24 X3.31 X3.16 X3.8 X3.7 Braid

Remarks

T4

X1.16 X1.15

T8

W2

X1.19 X1.20 X1.21 X1.22 X1.23 X1.24 X1.25 X1.26 X1.27 X1.28 X1.29 X1.30 X1.31 X1.32 X1.33 X1.34

R9

X1.54 X1.53

R13

T9

X1.56 X1.55

T13

R10

X1.58 X1.57

R14

T10

X1.60 X1.59

T14

R11

X1.62 X1.61

R15

T11

X1.64 X1.63

T15

R12

X1.66 X1.65

R16

T12

X1.68 X1.67 Shell

T16

W1/W2

Shell

5.7 External Clock Cable/Wayside Service Cable/STM-1e Cable


External clock cables, wayside service cables, and STM-1e cables use the same type of coaxial cables. This type of coaxial cable uses the SMB connector at one end to connect the PXC, SLE/ SDE or PL3 board. The other end of the cable connects the DDF. The connectors are made as required by the site.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-17

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-14 Diagram of the external clock cable/wayside service cable/STM-1e cable
1 Main Label

L
1. Coaxial cable connector, SMB, female

Cable Connection Table


None.

5.8 Auxiliary Interface Cable


Auxiliary interface cables are used to input/output external alarms, synchronous interface data, and asynchronous interface data. The cable uses a DB26 connector at one end to connect to the ALM/AUX interface on the SCC board. The other end of the cable is divided into four wires, which are wire W1, wire W2, wire W3, and wire W4. Wire W4 is terminated with one DB37 connector and is connected to the external alarm equipment through an alarm transfer cable. Wire W2 is terminated with one DB9 connector and is connected to the equipment that is used to transmit asynchronous data through a serial port cable. Wire W1 is also terminated with one DB9 connector but the DB9 connector is reserved for future use. Wire W3 is not terminated with a connector and is used to transmit synchronous data.

5-18

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-15 Diagram of the auxiliary interface cable
500mm 300mm W3 Label 7 A Label 4 W1 X2 Label 1 X1 View A 2 Main label
Pos.1 Pos.26
Pos.9

Label 5 Label 6

Label 8

View B W2 X3 Label 3

Pos.1

Label 2

View C
Pos.1

3 W4 C

X4 1000mm
Pos.37

1. Cable connector, type-D, 9 female 2. Cable connector, type-D, 26 male 3. Cable connector, type-D, 37 female Label 1: "OAM" Label 4: "F1" Label 7: "F1-TX-TIP" Label 2: "S1" Label 5: "F1-RX-TIP" Label 8: "F1-TX-RING" Label 3: "ALM" Label 6: "F1-RX-RING"

NOTE

In the preceding figure, "X3" indicates the asynchronous data interface, and "X2" indicates the reserved interface.

Cable Connection Table


Table 5-8 Auxiliary interface cable connections (1) Connector X1 X1.8 X1.16 X1.25 Connector X3 X3.2 X3.3 X3.5 Wire color white white blue Relation Pair Remarks R T GND

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-19

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 5-9 Auxiliary interface cable connections (2) Connector X1 X1.24 X1.6 Connector X4 X4.1 X4.2 Wire color white blue Relation Pair Remarks Out 2B Out 2A 1st channel (the 2ndchannel output alarm interface) 2nd channel (the 1stchannel output alarm interface) 3rd channel (the 6thchannel input alarm interface) 4th channel (the 5thchannel input alarm interface) 5th channel (the 4thchannel input alarm interface) 6th channel (the 3rdchannel input alarm interface) 7th channel (the 2ndchannel input alarm interface) 8th channel (the 1stchannel input alarm interface)

X1.21 X1.3

X4.3 X4.4

white orange

Pair

Out 1B Out 1A

X1.23 X1.14

X4.5 X4.6

white green

Pair

IN-6-GND IN-6

X1.5 X1.22

X4.7 X4.8

white brown

Pair

IN-5-GND IN-5

X1.13 X1.4

X4.9 X4.10

white gray

Pair

IN-4-GND IN-4

X1.20 X1.11

X4.11 X4.12

red blue

Pair

IN-3-GND IN-3

X1.2 X1.19

X4.13 X4.14

red orange

Pair

IN-2-GND IN-2

X1.10 X1.1

X4.15 X4.16

red green

Pair

IN-1-GND IN-1

5-20

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Table 5-10 Auxiliary interface cable connections (3) Connector X1 X1.7 Label on Cable W3 F1-RX-TIP Wire color white Relatio n Pair Remarks Synchronous data interface receiving data (+) Synchronous data interface receiving data (-) Pair Synchronous data interface transmitting data (+) Synchronous data interface transmitting data (-)

X1.12

F1-RX-RING

blue

X1.15

F1-TX-TIP

white

X1.17

F1-TX-RING

orange

5.9 External Alarm Transit Cable


External alarm transit cables are used to transit external alarm data. The cable uses the DB37 connector at one end to connect the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable. The other end of the cable connects external alarm equipment. The connectors are made as required by the site. The external alarm transit cable transits two alarm outputs and six alarm inputs.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-16 Diagram of the external alarm transit cable
A Pos.1 1 Main label

Pos.37
1. Cable connector, type-D, 37 male

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-21

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Cable Connection Table


NOTE

The cable has five types of signal wires of different colors inside. There are eight blue wires, six grey wires, six pink wires, six green wires, and six orange wires. The signal cables of the same color are differentiated by the red (RED) and black (BLK) dots on the cables. The cable with red dots is the signal cable. The cable with black dots is defined as the ground. One "x" indicates that there is one dot at regular intervals. For example, a blue/redxxx cable refers to a blue signal cable on which there are three dots at regular intervals.

Table 5-11 External alarm transit cable connections Conn ector X1 1 2 Color Relati on Pair Remarks Conn ector X1 17 18 Color Relati on Pair Rema rks 6th chann el

Pink/ Redx Pink/ Black x Orang e/ Redx Orang e/ Black x Blue/ Redx Blue/ Black x Green/ Redx

First channel (the 2ndchannel output alarm interface)

Green/ Redxx Green/ Black xx Grey/ Redxx Grey/ Black xx Pink/ Redxx x Pink/ Black xxx Orang e/ Redxx x Orang e/ Black xxx Blue/ Redxx x Blue/ Black xxx

Pair

Second channel (the 1stchannel output alarm interface)

19

Pair

13th chann el

20

Pair

8th channel (the 6thchannel input alarm interface)

21

Pair

14th chann el

22

Pair

9th channel (the 5thchannel input alarm interface )

23

Pair

12th chann el

Green/ Black x Grey/ Redx Grey/ Black x Pair 3rd channel (the 4thchannel input alarm interface)

24

25

Pair

5th chann el

10

26

5-22

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Conn ector X1 11

Color

Relati on Pair

Remarks

Conn ector X1 27

Color

Relati on Pair

Rema rks 11th chann el

Pink/ Redxx Pink/ Black xx Orang e/ Redxx Orang e/ Black xx Blue/ Redxx Blue/ Black xx

10th channel (the 3rdchannel input alarm interface

Green/ Redxx x Green/ Black xxx Grey/ Redxx x Grey/ Black xxx Blue/ Redxx xx Blue/ Black xxxx

12

28

13

Pair

4th channel (the 2ndchannel input alarm interface

29

Pair

15th chann el

14

30

15

Pair

7th channel (the 1stchannel input alarm interface)

31

Pair

16th chann el

16

32

5.10 Serial Port Cable


Serial port cables are used for the management and maintenance of the OptiX RTN 620. The cable uses the DB9 connectors at both ends, one for connecting the COM interface of the SCC board, the other for connecting the computer, NM serial, or modem. Serial port cables are also used to transit asynchronous data services. In this case, the cable connects the external alarm and asynchronous interface cable and the equipment that transmits asynchronous data.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-23

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-17 Diagram of the serial port cable
A Pos.9 1 Main lable

Pos.1

X1 L

X2

1. Cable connector, type-D, 9 male

Cable Connection Table


Table 5-12 Serial port cable connections Connector X1 X1.3 X1.2 X1.5 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.3 X2.5 Relation Pair

5.11 Orderwire Line


The orderwire line is used to connect orderwire phone sets. Both ends of the line use RJ-11 connectors. One end connects the PHONE interface of the SCC board and the other end connects the interface of the orderwire phone set.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-18 Diagram of the orderwire wire
1
6

Main Label
6

X1
1. Orderwire wire, RJ-11 connector

X2

5-24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Connection Table


Table 5-13 Orderwire wire connections Connector X1 X1.3 X1.4 Connector X2 X2.3 X2.4 Core Tip Ring

5.12 Network Cable


Network cables are used to connect Ethernet equipment. Both ends of a network cable use RJ-45 connectors. RJ-45 connectors have two types of interfaces. The first type is the medium dependent interface (MDI) used by terminal equipment such as network card. Refer to Table 5-14. The second type is the MDI-X used by network equipment. Refer to Table 5-15. Table 5-14 Pin assignments of the MDI Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TX+ TXRX+ Reserved Reserved RXReserved Reserved Function Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDA+ BIDABIDB+ BIDC+ BIDCBIDBBIDD+ BIDDFunction Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-)

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-25

5 Cables

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table 5-15 Pin assignments of the MDI-X Pin 10/100BASE-T(X) Signal 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 RX+ RXTX+ Reserved Reserved TXReserved Reserved Function Receiving data (+) Receiving data (-) Transmitting data (+) Transmitting data (-) 1000BASE-T Signal BIDB+ BIDBBIDA+ BIDD+ BIDDBIDABIDC+ BIDCFunction Bidirectional data wire B (+) Bidirectional data wire B (-) Bidirectional data wire A (+) Bidirectional data wire D (+) Bidirectional data wire D (-) Bidirectional data wire A (-) Bidirectional data wire C (+) Bidirectional data wire C (-)

Straight through cables are used between MDI and MDI-X interfaces, and crossover cables are used between MDI interfaces or between MDI-X interfaces. The only difference between the two network cables are the connections. The ETH and ETH-HUB ports on the SCC board, the four FE ports on the EFT4 board and the GE/FE electrical ports on the EMS6 board support MDI/MDI-X auto-sensing. Thus, both straight through cables and crossover cables can be used between these ports and the MDI/MDIX interfaces.

Cable Diagram
Figure 5-19 Diagram of the network cable
1 Label 1 Main Label Label 2 8 1

8 1

1. Network interface connector, RJ-45

5-26

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

5 Cables

Cable Connection Table


Table 5-16 Cable connection of the straight through cable Connector X1 X1.1 X1.2 X1.3 X1.6 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Connector X2 X2.1 X2.2 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8 Color White/Orange Orange White/Green Green Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown Pair Pair Pair Relation Pair

Table 5-17 Cable connection of the crossover cable Connector X1 X1.6 X1.3 X1.1 X1.2 X1.4 X1.5 X1.7 X1.8 Connector X2 X2.2 X2.1 X2.3 X2.6 X2.4 X2.5 X2.7 X2.8 Color Orange White/Orange White/Green Green Blue White/Blue White/Brown Brown Pair Pair Pair Relation Pair

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

5-27

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

A
Indicators of Boards
Indicator STAT

Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Table A-1 IF1A/IF1B indicator description Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally.

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green)

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-1

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

Status On (red)

Meaning The ODU has critical or major alarms, or has no power access. The ODU has minor alarms. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold. The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).

On (yellow) On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms BER On (yellow) Off RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)

Off

The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).

Table A-2 IFX indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red)

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services.

A-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Indicator

Status On (yellow) Off

Meaning A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The XPIC input signal is normal. The XPIC input signal is lost. The XPIC function is disabled. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms, or has no power access. The ODU has minor alarms. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).

XPIC

On (green) On (red) Off

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green) On (red)

On (yellow) On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms RMT On (yellow) Off ACT On (green)

Off

The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-3

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Table A-3 IF0A/IF0B indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms, or has no power access. The ODU has minor alarms. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold. The microwave bit errors are in the normal range. The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI.

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green) On (red)

On (yellow) On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms BER On (yellow) Off RMT On (yellow) Off

A-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Indicator ACT

Status On (green)

Meaning The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).

Off

The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).

Table A-4 IFH2 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The air link is normal. The air link is faulty. The ODU is working normally. The ODU has critical or major alarms, or has no power access. The ODU has minor alarms. The actually received power of the ODU is lower than the power to be received. The microwave bit errors exceed the threshold. The microwave bit errors are in the normal range.

LINK

On (green) On (red)

ODU

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) On: 300 ms (yellow) Off: 300 ms

BER

On (yellow) Off

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-5

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator RMT

Status On (yellow) Off

Meaning The remote system reports an RDI. The remote system does not report an RDI. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).

ACT

On (green)

Off

The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).

Table A-5 SL4 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The optical interface of the SL4 reports the R_LOS alarm. The optical interface of the SL4 has no R_LOS alarm.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

LOS

On (red)

Off

Table A-6 SL1/SD1 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) Meaning The board is working normally.

A-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Indicator

Status On (red) Off

Meaning The board hardware is faulty.


l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The first optical interface of the SL1/SD1 reports the R_LOS alarm. The first optical interface of the SL1/SD1 has no R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SD1 reports the R_LOS alarm. The second optical interface of the SD1 has no R_LOS alarm.

LOS1

On (red)

Off

LOS2

On (red)

Off

Table A-7 SLE/SDE indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green)

The services are normal.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-7

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

Status On (red) On (yellow) Off

Meaning A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

Table A-8 PL3 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

Table A-9 PO1/PH1/PD1 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green)

The services are normal.

A-8

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Indicator

Status On (red) On (yellow) Off

Meaning A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

Table A-10 EFT4 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

Table A-11 EMS6 indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-9

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator PROG

Status 100 ms on (green), and 100 ms off

Meaning When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost.

300 ms on (green), and 300 ms off

On (green) 100 ms on (red), and 100 ms off

On (red)

Off SRV On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off Green indicator (LINK1) On Off Yellow indicator (ACTIV1) On or flashing Off

The software is running normally. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured. The link at the GE1 port is normal. The link at the GE1 port fails. The GE1 port is transmitting or receiving data. The GE1 port is not transmitting or receiving data.

A-10

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Indicator Green indicator (LINK2)

Status On Off

Meaning The link at the GE2 port is normal. The link at the GE2 port fails. The GE2 port is transmitting or receiving data. The GE2 port is not transmitting or receiving data.

Yellow indicator (ACTIV2)

On or flashing Off

Table A-12 Description of indicators on the EFP6 Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initialized. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails. When the board is being powered or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost.

PROG

100 ms on (green), and 100 ms off

300 ms on (green), and 300 ms off

On (green) 100 ms on (red), and 100 ms off

On (red)

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-11

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

Status Off

Meaning The software is running normally. The services are normal. A critical or major alarm occurs in the services. A minor or remote alarm occurs in the services. The services are not configured.

SRV

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

Table A-13 PXC indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

PWR

On (green) On (red)

The power supply is working normally. The +3.3 V power supply is faulty, or the input -48 V power supply is abnormal. There is no power access. The clock is normal. The clock source is lost, or switching occurs to the clock source. The board is in the active state (1+1 protection). The board is activated (no protection).

Off SYNC On (green) On (red)

ACT

On (green)

A-12

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Indicator

Status Off

Meaning The board is in the standby state (1+1 protection). The board is not activated (no protection).

Table A-14 SCC indicator description Indicator STAT Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The board is working normally. The board hardware is faulty.
l l l

The board is not working. The board is not created. The board has no power access.

PROG

On: 100 ms (green) Off: 100 ms

When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is loading the software. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the board is in the BIOS boot state. The upper layer software is being initiated. When the board is being powered on or being reset, the BOOTROM self-check fails.
l

On: 300 ms (green) Off: 300 ms

On (green) On: 100 ms (red) Off: 100 ms

On (red)

When the board is being powered on or being reset, the memory self-check fails or loading upper layer software fails. When the board is running, the logic files or upper layer software is lost. The pluggable storage card is faulty.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-13

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Indicator

Status Off

Meaning The software is running normally. The system is working normally. A critical or major alarm occurs in the system. A minor alarm occurs in the system. The system has no power access. The system is in the maintenance state. The maintenance state includes loopback, laser shutdown, and ODU transmitting in silence. The system is in the working state.

ALM

On (green) On (red) On (yellow) Off

MANT

On (yellow)

Off

Table A-15 FAN indicator description Indicator FAN Status On (green) On (red) Off Meaning The fan is working normally. The fan is faulty. The board is not working, is not created, or has no power access.

Weight and Power Consumption of Boards


Table A-16 Weight of Boards Board IF1A IF1B IFX IF0A
A-14

Weight 420 g 400 g 450 g 520 g

Power Consumption < 12.2 W < 12.2 W < 14.5 W < 13.7 W
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

A Indicators, Weight and Power Consumption of Boards

Board IF0B IFH2 SL4 SL1 SD1 SLE SDE PL3 PO1 PH1 PD1 EFT4 EMS6 EFP6 PXC SCC

Weight 520 g 580 g 290 g 290 g 300 g 300 g 330 g 310 g 280 g 310 g 380 g 306 g 400 g 400 g 540 g 500g (SCCVER.B) 330g (SCCVER.C) 510g (SCCVER.E)

Power Consumption < 13.7 W < 16.4 W < 7.2 W <3W < 3.9 W < 4.2 W < 4.9 W < 5.1 W <2W < 2.8 W < 5.8 W < 7.5 W < 12.3 W < 11.6 W < 7.5 W < 7.0 W

FAN

350 g

< 9.7W

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

A-15

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

B Glossary

B
Terms are listed in an alphabetical order. Number 1U 1+1 protection

Glossary

The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/ 1.75 in.) A radio link protection system composed of one working channel and one protection channel. Two ODUs and two IF boards are used at each end of a radio link.

A Adaptive modulation A technology that is used to automatically adjust the modulation mode based on the channel quality. When the channel quality is favorable, the equipment adopts a high-efficiency modulation mode to improve the transmission efficiency and the spectrum utilization of the system. When the channel quality is degraded, the equipment adopts the low-efficiency modulation mode to improve the anti-interference capability of the link that carries high-priority services. A network element that adds/drops the PDH signal or STM-x (x < N) signal to/from the STM-N signal on the SDH transport network. A channel configuration method, which uses two adjacent channels (a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave) to transmit two signals.

Add/Drop multiplexer Adjacent channel alternate polarization

Automatic A method of adjusting the transmit power based on fading of the transmit transmit power signal detected at the receiver. control

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-1

B Glossary

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Co-channel dual polarization Cross polarization interference cancellation

A channel configuration method, which uses a horizontal polarization wave and a vertical polarization wave to transmit two signals. The cochannel dual polarization is twice the transmission capacity of the single polarization. A technology used in the case of the co-channel dual polarization (CCDP) to eliminate the cross-connect interference between two polarization waves in the CCDP.

D DC-C A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is shortcircuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and also on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is shortcircuited with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric equipment. A digital modulation controls the changes in amplitude, phase, and frequency of the carrier based on the changes in the baseband digital signal. In this manner, the information can be transmitted by the carrier. An antenna intended to radiate or receive simultaneously two independent radio waves orthogonally polarized.

DC-I

Digital modulation Dual-polarized antenna

E Equalization A method of avoiding selective fading of frequencies. Equalization can compensate for the changes of amplitude frequency caused by frequency selective fading. A symptom that the quality of the transmitted information is degraded because some bits of a data stream are errored after being received, decided, and regenerated. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over dedicated bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over shared bandwidth, point-to-point connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks. An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a dedocated bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

Bit error

Ethernet private line service Ethernet virtual private line service Ethernet private lan service

B-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

B Glossary

Ethernet virtual private lan service

An Ethernet service type, which carries Ethernet characteristic information over a shared bridge, point-to-multipoint connections, provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer networks.

F Forward error correction Frequency diversity A bit error correction technology that adds the correction information to the payload at the transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during transmission are corrected at the receive end. A diversity scheme that enables two or more microwave frequencies with a certain frequency interval are used to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading.

G Gateway network element A network element that is used for communication between the NE application layer and the NM application layer.

H Hybrid radio The hybrid transmission of Native E1 and Native Ethernet signals. Hybrid radio supports the AM function.

I Indoor Unit The indoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements accessing, multiplexing/demultiplexing, and IF processing for services.

Internet Group The protocol for managing the membership of Internet Protocol multicast Management groups among the TCP/IP protocols. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent Protocol multicast routers to establish and maintain multicast group memberships. Intermediate frequency IGMP snooping The transitional frequency between the frequencies of a modulated signal and an RF signal. A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyze the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet between hosts and layer 3 devices. In this manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented efficiently.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-3

B Glossary

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

Layer 2 switch

A data forwarding method. In LAN, a network bridge or 802.3 Ethernet switch transmits and distributes packet data based on the MAC address. Since the MAC address is the second layer of the OSI model, this data forwarding method is called layer 2 switch. The local maintenance terminal of a transport network, which is located on the NE management layer of the transport network. An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it were a single link. A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signals from the input of the trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferred signals.

LCT Link aggregation group Trail

M Multiplex section protection The function performed to provide capability for switching a signal between and including two MST functions, from a "working" to a "protection" channel.

N N+1 protection Network element A microwave link protection system that employs N working channels and one protection channel. A network element (NE) contains both the hardware and the software running on it. One NE is at least equipped with one system control board which manages and monitors the entire network element. The NE software runs on the system control Unit. The network management system in charge of the operation, administration, and maintenance of a network. A network element whose communication with the NM application layer must be transferred by the gateway network element application layer.

Network management system Non-gateway network element

O Orderwire Outdoor unit A channel that provides voice communication between operation engineers or maintenance engineers of different stations. The outdoor unit of the split-structured radio equipment. It implements frequency conversion and amplification for RF signals.

B-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

B Glossary

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Polarization

A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the minimum rate 64 kit/s into the 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s rates. A kind of electromagnetic wave, the direction of whose electric field vector is fixed or rotates regularly. Specifically, if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is perpendicular to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called vertically polarized wave; if the electric field vector of the electromagnetic wave is parallel to the plane of horizon, this electromagnetic wave is called horizontal polarized wave; if the tip of the electric field vector, at a fixed point in space, describes a circle, this electromagnetic wave is called circularly polarized wave.

Q QinQ A layer 2 tunnel protocol based on IEEE 802.1Q encapsulation. It encapsulates the tag of the user's private virtual local area network (VLAN) into the tag of the public VLAN. The packet carries two layers of tags to travel through the backbone network of the carrier. In this manner, the layer 2 virtual private network (VPN) is provided for the user.

R Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol, providing for faster spanning tree convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with the STP protocol.

S Single polarized antenna Space diversity An antenna that can transmit only one channel of polarized electromagnetic waves. A diversity scheme that enables two or more antennas separated by a specific distance to transmit/receive the same signal and selection is then performed between the two signals to ease the impact of fading. Currently, only receive SD is used. An algorithm defined in the IEEE 802.1D. It configures the active topology of a Bridged LAN of arbitrary topology into a single spanning tree. A logical entity in the transmission network, which comprises a group of network management objects. A subnet can contain NEs and other subnets. A function, which allows a working subnetwork connection to be replaced by a protection subnetwork connection if the working subnetwork connection fails, or if its performance falls below a required level. A hierarchical set of synchronous digital transport, multiplexing, and cross-connect structures, which is standardized for the transport of suitably adapted payloads over physical transmission networks.

Spanning Tree Protocol Subnet Subnetwork connection protection Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

B-5

B Glossary

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

U U2000 A unified network management system developed by Huawei. It can support all the NE level and network level management functions, and can manage the transport network, access network, and MAN Ethernet in a unified manner.

V Virtual LAN An end-to-end logical network that can travel through several network segments or networks by using the network management software based on the switch LAN. The IEEE 802.1Q is the main standard for the virtual LAN.

B-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

C
A AM APS ARP ATPC AU

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Acronyms and abbreviations are listed in alphabetical order.

Adaptive Modulation Automatic Protection Switching Address Resolution Protocol Automatic Transmit Power Control Administrative Unit

B BER BIP BPDU Bit Error Rate Bit-Interleaved Parity Bridge Protocol Data Unit

C CAR CBS CCDP CGMP CIR CLNP CLNS CoS CPU Committed Access Rate Committed Burst Size Co-Channel Dual Polarization Cisco Group Management Protocol committed information rate connectionless network protocol Connectionless Network Service Class of Service Central Processing Unit

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-1

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

CRC CVLAN C-VLAN

cyclic redundancy check Customer VLAN Customer VLAN

D DC DCC DCN DSCP DVMRP Direct Current Data Communications Channel Data Communication Network differentiated services code point Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

E ECC EoPDH EoS EPL EPLAN ERPS ES-IS EVPL Embedded Control Channel Ethernet Over PDH Ethernet Over SDH Ethernet Private Line Ethernet Private LAN Ethernet Ring Protection Switching End System to Intermediate System Ethernet Virtual Private Line

F FCS FD FE FIFO FLP FTP Frame Check Sequence Frequency Diversity Fast Ethernet First In First Out Fast Link Pulse file transfer protocol

G GE GFP Gigabit Ethernet Generic Framing Procedure

C-2

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

GTS GUI

Generic Traffic Shaping Graphical User Interface

H HDLC HSB HSM High level Data Link Control procedure Hot Standby Hitless Switch Mode

I ICMP IDU IEEE IETF IF IGMP IP IPv6 IS-IS ISO ITU-T IVL Internet Control Message Protocol Indoor Unit Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers The Internet Engineering Task Force Intermediate Frequency Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Protocol Internet Protocol version 6 Intermediate System to Intermediate System International Standard Organization International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector Independence VLAN learning

L LAN LAPD LAPS LCAS LCT LMSP Local Area Network Link Access Procedure on the D channel Link Access Procedure-SDH Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Generation-Local Craft Terminal Linear Multiplex Section Protection

M MAC
Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Medium Access Control


Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. C-3

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

MBS MDI MIB MPLS MSP MTU

Maximum Burst Size Medium Dependent Interface Management Information Base multiprotocol label switching Multiplex Section Protection Maximum Transmission Unit

N NE NLP NMS NNI NSAP Network Element Normal Link Pulse Network Management System Network-to-Network Interface or Network Node Interface Network Service Access Point

O ODU OSI OSPF Outdoor Unit Open Systems Interconnection Open Shortest Path First

P PDH PIM-DM PIM-SM PPP Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Protocol Independent Multicast-Dense Mode Protocol Independent Multicast-Sparse Mode Point-to-Point Protocol

Q QinQ QoS 802.1Q in 802.1Q Quality of Service

R RF RFC radio frequency Request For Comment

C-4

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

RIP RMON RSL RSTP RTN

Routing Information Protocol Remote Monitoring Received Signal Level Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Radio Transmission Node

S SD SDH SNC SNCP SNMP SNR STM STM-1 STM-1e STM-1o STM-4 STM-N STP SVL Space Diversity Synchronous Digital Hierarchy SubNetwork Connection Sub-Network Connection Protection Simple Network Management Protocol Signal-to-Noise Ratio Synchronous Transport Module SDH Transport Module -1 STM-1 Electrical Interface STM-1 Optical Interface SDH Transport Module -4 SDH Transport Module -N Spanning Tree Protocol Shared VLAN Learning

T TCI TCP TU Tag Control Information Transfer Control Protocol Tributary Unit

U UDP UNI User Datagram Protocol user-network interface

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

C-5

C Acronyms and Abbreviations

OptiX RTN 620 IDU Hardware Description

VC VC12 VC-12 VC3 VC-3 VC4 VC-4 VCG VLAN VoIP VPN

Virtual Container Virtual Container -12 Virtual Container -12 Virtual Container -3 Virtual Container -3 Virtual Container -4 Virtual Container -4 Virtual Concatenation Group Virtual LAN Voice over IP Virtual Private Network

W WAN WRR WTR Wide Area Network Weighted Round Robin Wait to Restore Time

X XPD XPIC Cross-Polarization Discrimination Cross-polarization interference cancellation

C-6

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2010-03-30)

You might also like